HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5836 - Contract - Lubbock Building Services Inc - Parks Department Building Renovations - 04/23/1998RESOLUTION N0. 5836
Item #44
April 23, 1998
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute a contract with associated documents for and on behalf of the City
of Lubbock with Lubbock Building Services, Inc., of Lubbock, Texas, to install and
furnish all materials and services as bid for the Parks Department building renovations.
Said agreements are attached hereto and incorporated in this Resolution as if fully set
forth herein and shall be included in the minutem nf the Council.
Passed by the City Council this 23r,j day o
ATTEST:
1644�
Kay6k Darnell, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
etAq h F —
Victor Kilm , Purchasing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
Linda Chamales
Supervising Attorney/Office Practice
ge/cedocs/Ivb Bldg Sc v,res
April 15, 1998
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING RENOVATIONS
AT 1010 STH STREET
BID #98069
♦ T Y O
�� 11
593�
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
r
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock. Texas 79457
(806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164
ITB /98069, Addendum 01
ADDENDUM 0
ITB #98069
PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING
RENOVATIONS AT 1010 a STREET
MAILED TO VENDOR: March 27,1998
Office of
Purchasing
CLOSE DATE: April 2,1998 @ 2:00 PM
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB).
Where any item called for In the ITB documents Is supplemented here, the original requirements, not
affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed the revised Bid Submittal Form for your bid submittal.
2. DRAWINGS — Supply new 2'x2' lay -in ceiling panels, grid and 2'x4' fiuorescenf light fixtures In
second floor lobby ceiling. Refer to attached drawing Addendum No. 1, Item 1.
3. DRAWINGS — Sheet Al, Enlarged Demo Plan 4/A1; add notes to demo plan for removal of
existing terrazzo the in existing Men's and Women's toilets. Refer to attached drawing
Addendum No. 1, Item 2.
4. DRAWINGS — Sheet Al, Enlarged Toilet Pian 5/A1; add notes for sloping the floor in Corridor
A102 to floor elevation In existing file room to the north. Refer to attached drawing Addendum
No. 1, Item 3.
5. DRAWINGS — Plan Detail for planter comer repair. Refer to attached drawing Addendum No. 1,
Item #4.
6. DRAWINGS -� Sheet Al, Enlarged Toilet Plan 5/A1, Legend Floor Plan; change note for symbol
forth from the top to read '1 HR WALL TO DECK'.
7. SPECIFICATIONS — Section 09319, paragraph 2.3 A, unglazed paver tile shall be ceramic the
not porcelain tile.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted In writing and directed to:
Questions maybe faxed to:
or Email to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
(806) 775-2164
RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
XS
K /ed
hu
Senior Buyer
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID
98069ad1.doe
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
PLACE:
DATE: _
PROJECT NUMBER: #98069 - PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING RENOVATIONS AT 1010 9TH STREET
Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder).
CTo the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
FThe Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a
having carefully examined the plans,
specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related
contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor,'hereby intends to furnish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents,
within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the
work required under the contract documents.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL BID: ($ )
ALTERNATE 01: Interior painting of existing offices.
MATERIALS: ($
SERVICES: $
TOTAL ALTERNATE BID 1 (ADD): ($
(Amount nt shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
F"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 90 (NINETY) consecutive calendar days
thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner
as liquidated damages the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of
the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the
contract documents.
rBidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
` instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
r
bidding. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
l after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
�^ The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
f plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
" commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work
on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond Is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds Of
required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars
which it Is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by
�- the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the
Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check
or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection In accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Authorized Signature
(Printed or Typed Name)
Company
Address
City, County
State Zip Code
Telephone:
Fax:
r
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
Secretary
r Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda No.
Date
Addenda No.
_ Date
Addenda No.
Date
Addenda No.
Date
r
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Minority Owned
Yes
No
0
0
0
0
0
❑
0
0
0
0
❑
0
0
0
0
0
0
❑
0
0
3
• � 1
maOM
i
r:1
TELL—
i -
5 - - w4' LAr-N F'LUCRESCeVT
LIGW FIXTURE TYPE -A-
REFE3? TO L+C-t FiXT,
50-B7LA_E 5WT. E1 1. COWECI
FOR EXiSTTNG STD CRGJIT/
RECE5SE0 ,
LIGHT TO BE REMOVED BY �
• - ..,•
•�:
ZrZ LAY-N Ac<xt T;CAL
C EL44G PANF-S - EOL)A{-
TO USG AL4ZATOW OW14 PRGDjOT n345
OR ARMSTRCW-% CORTEGA PRODUCT 36769
i REELECTED CEILING PLAN
kADIJ
5CA1.E• SECo1 FLopQ.=:..: .
r .ADDS N0.1 ffEM I-
M�f�ipw'i`wtg • y'��4'!►'V��1 .......-r..�... .—....... .. , .. i . .-� �. wi+-ram.- .+.—�-...... . i• .� 1 •_':YY�t.aw_ •_r' �.
■
1
0
if
J1
_
r
M IrVJ
�! Jim,
_
0
U-
I
g
CA
LL
NCX.LVA2M
=162A (3-G61
en
I
Y
U�
U—
�Q
CITY OF LUBBOCK
BID #98069
PARKS DEPARTMENT OFFICE
RENOVATIONS tot, 1010 9T11 STREET
ALTERNATE # 1
SCOPE:
The contractor shall supply all labor and material for the interior painting of existing offices at the Parks
Department Offices located at 1010 9`s Street, Lubbock, Texas. The work shall included items as indicated
on the plans and in accordance with the attached Room Finish Schedule.
A. PREPARATION
EXISTING SURFACE
PROCEDURE
NOTES
Cove Base
Remove all cove base.
Must comply with
Dry Wall
Remove all items from surfaces. Patch all
Must comply with
holes to allow for proper application of
09900.
Dry Wall
primer and paint.
Must comply with
Vinyl
Remove all items from surfaces. Properly
Must comply with
repair damaged surfaces.
09900.
Plaster, CMU, Brick
Remove all items from surfaces. Patch all
Must comply with
holes, cracks and other damaged areas.
09900.
General
Properly clean all surfaces to remove dirt,
Must comply with
Plaster, CMU, Brick
grime, and other items/materials that will
09900.
prevent proper application of paint/primer.
09900.
B. PAINT APPLICATION
SURFACE
PAINT/PRIMER
NOTES
Door Frames — Metal
Primer: Not required.
Must comply with
Paint: I coat semi -gloss acrylic -latex interior
09900.
enamel.
Dry Wall
Primer: Latex base interior primer.
Must comply with
Paint: 2 coats semi -gloss, acrylic -latex
09900.
interior enamel.
Vinyl
Primer: As required for vinyl wall coverings.
Must comply with
Paint: 2 coats semi -gloss acrylic -latex
09900.
interior enamel.
Plaster, CMU, Brick
Primer: Not required
Must comply with
Paint: 2 costs semi -gloss, acrylic -latex
09900.
interior enamel.
General
Primer: As required.
:Must comply with
Paint: As required.
09900.
C. CLEANUP
Must be in accordance with section 09900 of the contract specifications.
r
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE
ALTERNATE #1 - CITY OF LUBBOCK BID #98069
_
ROOM
126
127
L
F_
:B_A_SE_
l
WALLS
CEILING EXIST WALLS NOTES
NAME
NO
_R
FLOOR
N
S
E
W
HEIGHT N
2
S
E
W
Lobby_-__
100
1
2
2-2
Office
2
2
--- 2
2
3
1
2
Office
1
2
-2
2
2 --
2-
2-
2
1
1
1
1
Office - -
i 02 ---�
---.
. 2
2..__
2
..- 2
-2 --
- -- 1 ..
2
1
-- 1
. 1
1
Office
103.
1
2
2
_ 2
_2
. _
- 9 -
1 .
1
1'
1-
Office
104
1
- 2
2-_2._.2
133 !
1 2
. 2.---
-1-
1
1
- 1-1
-
Storage
105
1
2
2
2
2^
2
1-
1
1-
-1
1 - 1
Reception
106
1
2
2
2
°2
2
1
1
1
1
1
Vestibule
107
1
2
2
2;
2
2
1
6.
2
6
2
Interview
108
1
2
2!
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
Office
109
1
2
2;
2.
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
'Hall
110
1
2
12
12
2
2
1
6'
2
2
2 --
:Office
1 111:
1
2'
2
12
12
2
i 1
1'
1
1
1
:Office
112
1
2'
2!
2
12
2
1
1
1-1-
-
Hall
.113:
1
2
2!
2
12
2
1
2
2
2
2
Hall
114,
1
2
2
2;
2
2
1
2
6
2
2 - -_
Office115
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1 -
Office _
.-116
1
2 -
- 2
- 2-
-2 -
2 ---
-- 1
1-
Office -- ---117
1
2-2
--
2
2 - --2
-
1
1 _-
__..
Office
118
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1_
1
1
1-----
Corridor
119
1
2
2
2
2-
2
1- -1
1
1
1 --
Conference
120
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
_
2 -
Copy
121
1
2
2.
2
2
Break Room
122
1
2
2.
2
2
2
1
3
1
1
1 --
'File
123
1
2
2
i2
.2
2
1
3
5
3
1 -
124 4
Women's
Corridor
126
127
WALLS TO BE PAINTED
l
1. No Work Required
2. Repair Walls & Paint
FLOOR
4
4
Office ---
128
1 2
2
2
2
2
1
2i
2
2
2
2
Office
129
1 2
2
i2
2
2
1
3
1
2
2
Vault
130:
1 1
2
:2
2
2
1
3
1
3
3
3
Closet
131'
1 2
2
:2
2
2
1
3
1
1
1.
Closet
132!
1 2!
2
2
2
2
1
3 ,1
1
1
Office
133 !
1 2
.2
2
2
2
1
1
1
3
1
Office
134 '
1 1 2
2'
2'
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
Hall
1 200;
1 1 2
2'
2
!2
2:
3
1i
1
3
1
'Drafting
201 ;
1 2:
21
2.
2.
2
3.
1
3
3
1
:Office
1202
1 2!
2
2
12;
2
3:
31
1
3:
1
:Office
12031
1 2
12
2
1 2'
2
3-
3'
1
1
1
Telephone 204 ; 1 i 2 2 1 2! 2' 2 3 3i, 1 3! 1 _
Storage _ ' 205 4
BASE
1. No Work Required
2. Remove Existing Base
CEILING HEIGHT
1. 8'
2. 12'6'
3. 9'
[ NOTES
1. Wooden shelves on west wall to remain.
2. Wooden shelves on east wall to remain.
3. Wooden shelves on south wall to remain.
4. No work required.
EXISTING WALL CONDITIONS
1. DRYWALL
2. VINYL
3. PLASTER
4. CMU
5. Brick
6. Not Applicable
KEY TO FINISH SCHEDULE
WALLS TO BE PAINTED
l
1. No Work Required
2. Repair Walls & Paint
FLOOR
1. No Work Required
BASE
1. No Work Required
2. Remove Existing Base
CEILING HEIGHT
1. 8'
2. 12'6'
3. 9'
[ NOTES
1. Wooden shelves on west wall to remain.
2. Wooden shelves on east wall to remain.
3. Wooden shelves on south wall to remain.
4. No work required.
EXISTING WALL CONDITIONS
1. DRYWALL
2. VINYL
3. PLASTER
4. CMU
5. Brick
6. Not Applicable
2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN
Al SCAM '�e~ = r -O~
❑C
MAP IN FILE
SEE
RESOLUTION
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INVITATION TO BID
FOR
TITLE: PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING RENOVATIONS
AT 1010 9TH STREET
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 98069
PROJECT NUMBER: 9623.9211.20000
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
INDEX
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BID SUBMITTAL — BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
PAYMENT BOND
PERFORMANCE BOND
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACT
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
No Text
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
�.. BID #98069
Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the
office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00
r.. o'clock p.m. on the 2nd day of April, 1998, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to
furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
"PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING RENOVATIONS AT 1010 9TH STREET"
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the
Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud.
It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for
i the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 26th4m of April, 1998, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th
Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids
and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with
Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price
exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.
"" Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the
bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a
guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of
award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local
conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been
thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre-bid conference on 26th
day of March, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the L04 - Purchasing Conference Room, Lubbock, Texas
a
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is
ra specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a,
Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the
contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
r- The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
( advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to
this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in
consideration for an award.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against Persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and
bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more
accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 767-
2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
tCITY OF LUBBOCK
V
VICTOR KI MAN
PURCHASING MANAGER
Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department 513th Street,
Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806) 775-2167/Fax (806) 775-2164.
No Text
I
f
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to
complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING
RENOVATIONS AT 1010 9TH STREET.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General
Conditions.
i All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the
construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by
.. said contract documents.
3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
1^ It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by
the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without
charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice
*� to Bidders.
i
4. BIDDER INQUIRIES
No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification
concerning this bid must be addressed to:
RON SHUFFIELD
SENIOR BUYER
CITY OF LUBBOCK
P.O. BOX 2000
LUBBOCK, TX 79457
FAX (806) 775-2164
5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 90 (NINETY) consecutive
calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful
` bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the
City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the
contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by
the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may
direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the
time specified.
6. PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the
'` contract documents.
I 1. PROTECTION OF THE WORK
r" The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any
and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the
date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have
been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by
the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article
20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials
to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a
way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or
other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the
project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the
location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve
the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by
Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by
Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and
shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be
necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs,
and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and
replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of
barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
15. EXPLOSIVES
The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from
the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume
full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all
cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life
or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or
corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
r►r
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it
shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in
proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given
sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their
property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage
resulting from his blasting operations.
16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the
work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and
telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by
this contract is in progress.
17. INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall .be furnished to the City and written notice of _
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All
policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor
shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as
hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall
be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all
operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate
policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each
and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The Insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative,
shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular
project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof
of coverage Insurance documents Including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor.
18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in
the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned.. The bidders' attention is further
directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the
wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of
general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from
compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an
inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service
to its citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort
to complete the contract within the allotted time:
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must
notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires
to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on
whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's
Representative.
4
t'^
a,
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this
contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work,
r regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer
i
dangerous to property or life.
19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount,
not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the
work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or
Engineer, a certified, swom, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his
classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the
copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made,
or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees
according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which
schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on
whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each
calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his
particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents.
20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the
bidder without being considered.
21. PREPARATION FOR BID
The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled
in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work
contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or
typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price
written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly
authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each
member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly
authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business
address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing
agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid
shall be executed in ink.
Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed
on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Bid for (description of the project).
Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no
bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
r�- Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the
following:
r
W
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Submittal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
(j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS _
The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein
in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy
the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable —
investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the
bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of
Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to
satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to
complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include:
1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required.
2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified,
without delay or interference.
3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder.
4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
h
6
No Text
N
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
PLACE: 1625 13th
DATE: 04-02-98
PROJECT NUMBER: #98069 - PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING RENOVATIONS AT 1010 9TH STREET
Bid of _ JUBBO c B[TI[ATNG SERVICES, IWC.
(hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a PARKS 1J WTHE err
B rMTNG RONOVATIONS AT 1010 9th STREW
` having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related
contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the pians, specifications and contract documents,
within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses Incurred in performing the
work required under the contract documents.
MATERIALS:
r SERVICES:
civs/S..-d 'V%✓
TOTAL BID: 1 1 +-
ALTERNATE #1: Interior painting of existing offices.
day
r MATERIALS: ($ `/ e*> ' )
` SERVICES• %,W--4 cf 04e- C/$ +� ,�, �
TOTAL ALTERNATE BID 1 (ADD): %r
)
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govem.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 90 (NINETY) consecutive calendar days
thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner
as liquidated damages the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of
z the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the
contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
r
bidding. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work
�., on which he has bid; as provided In the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check Issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if
required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashiers Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% BOND Dollars
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by
the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the
Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check
or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be execute Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance wjffi t e Notice to Bidde
or Typed Name)
I ala:_* H: :, 1) 00 V
'HIP5Dl:v/ My. 1.;
Company
5121 69th S'QI'I'E B-1
Address
_TX1HQOCK, LUBBOCK
Cite County79424
State Zip Code
Telephone: 806 .,798-7005
Fax: 806 - 798-8256
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTES .
Secretary
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda N - �-
No. Datel,S
Addenda No. Date
Addenda No. Date
Addenda No. Date
Bond # 471209
• (C�� •l�i��1N111;MN1'1'Y CU��I'UI�A'1'I
(a Stock Company, organized under the laws of Wisconsin)
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That we, Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
(hereinafter called
the "Principal"), as Principal, and the Capitol Indemnity Corporation of Madison, Wisconsin a corporation duly
organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (hereinafter called the "Surety"), as Surety,
are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock
(hereinafter called the "Obligee"), in
the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF AMOUNT BID BY PRINCIPAL------- Dollars (S 5% of Bid ),
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
IWHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for
Renovation of Restroom to Comply to ADA
"City of Lubbock Parks Building Renovations"
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a
Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may
be specified in the bidding or Contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful
performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution
Ithereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds,
if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount
specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another
party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to
remain in full force and effect.
Signed and sealed this 2nd day of Apri 1
Witness
A.D. 19 98
-Lubbock Building Services, Inc. (SEAL)
(SEAL)
(Principal)
�c
(Title)
CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION
A Wisconsin Corporation, (Surety)
Vq&AD
INDEMNITY CORPORATION
4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705-0900
PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADISON, WI 53705-0900
PHONE (608) 231-4450 - FAX (608) 231-2029
POWER OF ATTORNEY No: 4 i 1_ L
Know all men by these Presents, That.the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, a corporation
of the State of Wisconsin, having its principal offices in the City. of:: Madison, Wisconsin, does make, constitute and appoint
STACI J. GROSS, LAURA A. ESPINOZA, STEVE DEAL OR DONAL BOLEY
its true and lawful Attorneys) -in -fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf, as surety, and as its act'
and deed, any and ailbonds, undertakings and contracts of Suretyship, provided that. no bond or undertaking or contract
of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of
�..; NOT TO EXCEED $4,000,000.00 -
This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following
Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION at a meeting duly called and
held .on the 5th day of May 1960:
-RESOLVED, that the President, and Vice- President, :the Secretary or Treasurer, acting individually or otherwise, be and they hereby are granted
the power and authorization to appoint by a Power of Attorney for the purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings, and other
writings obligatory in the. nature. thereof, one or more resident vice-presidents. assistantsecretaries and attorney(s)-in-fact, each appointee to have
the powers and duties usual to such offices to the business' of:this company: the signature of such officers and seal of the Company may be affixed
i., to any such: power of attorney of to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate: bearing such facsimile
f signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and
P facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in the
nature thereof to which it is attached. Any such appointment may be revoked, for cause. or without cause, by any of said officers, at any time."
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION has caused these presents to be signed by
its officer undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed duly attested by its Secretary, this 1 St day of June, 1993.
CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION
f�.. Attest:
';L .
'Vi7rgiA11ie M. Schulte, Secretary coRPoaarE'-= Geo . Fait, President
SEAL i
STATE OF WISCONSIN
COUNTY OF DANE
On the 1 st da of June, A.D., 1993, before me personally came George A Fait, to me known, who beingb me dui
.sworn, did __depose__and say: that. resides in the County: of Dane_ State of Wisconsin; that he is. the resident of
CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument: that-
�'" he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so
affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
STATE OF WISCONSIN` syr
PETER ;
* Marls * Peter E. Hans
COUNTY OF DANE G Notary Public, Dane Co., WI
�AYPuB�\\\���` My Commission is Permanent
mi�rrnlulnu\
CERTIFICATE
I, the undersigned, duly elected to the office stated below, now the incumbent in CAPITOL INDEMNITY
CORPORATION, a Wisconsin Corporation, authorized.to make this certificate, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing
attached Power of Attorney remains n full force and has not been revoked; and furthermore that the Resolution of the
Board of Directors, set forth in the Power of Attorney is now in force.
Signed and sealed at the City of Madison. Dated the 2nd day of April , 19 gg
�a ee:virv� /iii
, a O AO
`a CORPORATE '_'
Paul J. Bre er, Treasurer
fill
This power is valid only if the power o! �:ttorney number printea in the upper right hand corner appears in red. Photocopies. carbon copies or
other reproductions are not binding on the cc,ioany. Inquiries concerning this power of attorney may be directed to the Bond Manager at the Home
Office of the Capitol Indemnity Corporation.
No Text
r
1619
Bond #734686
STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a)
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000)
Lubbock Building Services Inc.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as
Principal(s), and
Capitol Indemnity Corporation
(hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the
Obligee), in the amount of $64 JAc) _ nn Dollars ($--64, R8 .00) lawful money of the
United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 23rd day of
April , 19 98 to
Bid #98069—Parks Department Building Renovations at 1010 9th Street
and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in
the amount of said contract which contract Is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as
if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that If the said Principal shall pay all
claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for In said
contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the
Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined In accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this Instrument this
27th day of April 1998
Capitol Indemnity Corporation
Surety
1
.BY
(Title) StaCi Gross
Attorney—in—Fact
Lubbock D4ilding Services, Inc.
Prin
y' e�
(Titley
By:
(Title)
By:
(Title)
R
The undersigned surety company represents that it Is duly qualified to do business In Texas, and hereby
designates * an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered
,., and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
r
* Boley Featherston Insurance Company Capitol Indemnity Corporation
Surety
Y• �J
(Tide) Staci Gross
Attorney—in—Fact
Approved as to form:
}^ City of Lubbock
i By:
City Attorney
Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing
} that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our files.
P
i
E
W
t
2
l
l:
of
,f
rqaw INDEMNITY CORPORATION
4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705-0900
PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADISON, WI 53705-0900
PHONE (608) 231.4450 - FAX (608) 231.2029
POWER OF ATTORNEY No: 4711-D 5 5 5
f4now.all men by these".Presents, That.the CAPITOL INDEMNITY' CORPORATION, ab
orpor4 ion
the Mate of Wisconsrn having its prrncipal offtceS in;the Clty. of Madison, Wisconsrn';;does make, canstttute and appoint ...
------------ STACI J. GROSS, LAURA A. ESPINOZA, STEVE DEAL OR DONAL BOLEY
its true and lawful
and.;deed, any am
::of suretyship exec;
This Power
y�s� rr fact, to make, execute, seal. and deliver far artd on Its behalf, as surety;' and ass act
ids, undertakings and contracts of suretyship,provided that;rto bond pr undertaking or:contract
der this authority steal! exceed in amount the sum of
I Resolution, adopted by the 13oard of Directors...of CAPITOL INt]EMNITY;CORPORATION at a meeting duly.called and.
held on the'5th day of May 1980::iv
"RESbLVED; that the President, and Vice -President, the Secretary or Treasurer acting individually;or otherwise, be and they hereby; are granted
the :power and authorization to appoint b I, a Power of :Attorney for the ','purposes onty of;.executing and attesting bonds and, undertakings, and; other
writings obligatory in;the nature thereof, one or more resident vice-presidents, assistantsecretanes and attorneys) in -fact each appointee to .have
`the' powers, and dunes usual Co such offices to the business .of this company; the signature of such officers and seal of the Company may be affixed
to any <such .:power of;attorney:or to any certificate relating thereto:by facsimile,<arnd any. such power o€;attorney or certificate bearing such #acsi.
signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the' Company, and any such 'power so executed a
facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or underi
.. nature thereof to which it is attached. Any such appointment maybe revoked, for cause, or without cause, by any
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION has caused
its officer undersigned and its.corporate seat to be hereto affixed duly attested by its Secre
CAPITOL INDEMI
certified by facsimile signatures and
ng or other writing obligatory in the
said officers, at any ttme ".
ese presents to be signed by
int;':.
,TION
betng by me duly
resident of
girder
so
STATE OF WISCONSIN PETER
COUNTY OF DANE
iwNs
Peter E. Hans "
Notary Public, Dane Co;, WI
My Commission is Permanent
CERTIFICATE
I, the undersigned, duly elected to the office stated below,
now the incumbent in CAPITOL INDEMNITY
CORPORATION, a Wisconsin Corporation, authorized to make this certificate,
DO. HEREBY CERTIFY that the.#oregoing
attached Power: of Attorney remains in full force and has 'not been revoked; and furthermore that the Resolution. of the
Board of Directors, set folh. in ahe Power of Attorney is now in force
.
Signed and sealed at the City of Madison. Dated the 27th
41t111111!!!y//
'day of April , 1;9 98
�J4 p N17S'CO�A///�i
affa CORPORATE E
A
EtL
=- SEAL ; r
1A
Paul J Bre er. Treasurer
This power is valid only ,if the power of attorney number printed in the upper right:hand corner' appears ,in red. Photocopies, carbon copies or
other reproductions are not binding ori the company. Inquiries concerning thi power of attorneymay be directed to the Bond Manager at the Home
Office of the Capitol Indemnity Corporation.
No Text
7
Bond #734686
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(x)
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000)
Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and
Capitol Indemnity Corporation
(hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the
Obligee), in the amount of $64,889.00 Dollars ($ 64,889.00 ) lawful money of the
United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered Into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 2�7day of
April , 19 98 to
w
7
Bid #98069 -Parks Department Building Renovations at 1010 9th Street
and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in
the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as
if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully
perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void:
otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253,021(a) of the
Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this _7th
day of p= ri 1 , 19.x,.
itol Indemnity Corporation
Surety
By:
,(Title) ci oss
Attorney—in—Fact
Lubbock ppilding Services, Inc.
Prin ,p I J c= 22
(Till
By:
(Title)
By:
(Title)
The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby
designates * an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered
and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
* Boley Featherston Insurance Company Capitol Indemnity Corporation
Surety
•
By. �' t.�
Y
(Title) Staci Gross
Attorney—in—Fact
Approved as to form:
City of Lubbock
By:
City Attorney
• Note: if signed by an officer of the Sureiy Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing
that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney In Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our files.
f"
x
1.
2
I,
r
No Text
.,.
.�+ 1
:.: / [[�II
�1�11/® �EI 1>:II:[
f�y,� ;> ::r•;.:C..:::;:i?ii::;i$t?i3<i%�iz::::::r::::5:�:i::ii:iz:;: DATE (MM/DD/YY)
G. ::... ... :.: 04128!98
PRODUCER
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
Butler-Carson Insurance Agency
4505 82nd St Suite X10
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
Lubbock TX 79424.3200
COMPANY
A Commercial Casualty
INSURED
COMPANY
Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
B MARYLAND INSURANCE COMPAN
COMPANY
C NORTHERN INS. CO. OF NEW
P. O. Boz 65600.194
1 Lubbock TX 79464
COMPANY
D MARYLAND CASUALTY COMPANY
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
LTR
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER POLICY
DATE
EFFECTIVE
(MMIDDNY)
POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE (MM/DD/YY)
LOGITS
D
GENERAL
LIABILITY
EPA32131667
09/03/97
09/03/98
GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1,000,1
PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 1,000,1
X
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
CLAIMS MADE OCCUR
PERSONAL 3 ADV INJURY $ 1,000,1
OWNERS 6 CONTRACTOR'S PROT
EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,1
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) S 500,1
MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,
B
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
WAA22761986
09/03/97
09/03/98
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 500,1
ANY AUTO
BODILY INJURY
(Per person) S
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
(Per accident) $
X HIRED AUTOS
X NON-OWNED AUTOS
PROPERTY DAMAGE $
GARAGE LIABILITY
AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:
ANY AUTO
S
S
C
EXCESS LIABILITY
UBA82535254
09/03/97
09/03/98
EACH OCCURRENCE S 1,000,(
AGGREGATE S
X UMBRELLA FORM
S
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
WC STATU- 0TH-
_.._.
EL EACH ACCIDENT $ 100,
A
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
THE PROPRIETOR/ INCL
PAM NERSrEXECUTIVE
OFFICERS ARE: EXCL
710443778
09/29/97
09/29/98
EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 500,'
EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE S 100,
OTHER
D
OCP - CITY OF LUBBOCK
BINDER
04/23/98
04/23/99
OCCURRENCE LIMIT 500
AGGREGATE LIMIT 500
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSiLOCATIONSNEHICLESSPECUtL ITEMS
EACH POLICY OTHER THAN THE WORKER'S COMPENSATION SHOWS THE CITY OF LUBBOCK
p-LAS
ADDITIONAL INSURED; WITH WAIVER OF SUBROGATION; AND 10 DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE OF CANCELLATION. THE WORKERS' COMPENSATION POLICY IS ENDORSED TO
L
„WAIVE RIGHTS OF SUBROGATION TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AND 10 DAYS WRITTEN
C ERTiE~KATE;::1'I€>LEiER
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
CITY OF LUBBOCK EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
P.O. BOX 2000 i0 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
LUBBOCK TX 79457 BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH N HALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
OF ANY KIND UPON THE CAfW,AG R REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESS !-
I JOHN C. CA_ .
LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES, INC.
JERRY SMITH, PRESIDENT
P.O. BOX 65600-194 • LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79464-5600
PH. (806) 798-7005 9 FAX (806) 798-8256 • E-mail LBSIQjuno.com
AFFIDAVIT
May 4, 1998
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, TX 79457
I Jerry Smith do hereby certify that Lubbock Building Services, Inc. has done projects in
the past, is currently doing projects, and plans to do projects in the future for the City of Lubbock
and that Lubbock Building Services, Inc. does not now and has not in the past owned any
automobiles. In the event Lubbock Building Services, Inc. purchases any automobiles, a
certificate of insurance will be provided to the City of Lubbock at that time.
J,
t
Vie.►'• •�,,� JAMES L GAINES
NOTARY PUBLIC
STATE OF TEXAS
My Comm. Exp. 04-22-2000
tnM^r .
19 9
04/27/1998 13:30 e06798e256
LUBBOCK BLDG SVCS
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Appropriate Insurance Agent/Sroker
Prior to Award of Contract �®
PAGE 10
I, the undersigned Agent/Broker. certify that the Insurance requirements contained In this bid document have
been reviewed by me with the below Identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor Is awarded this
contract by the City of Lubbock, i will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by
contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this
bid/proposal.
�-• Gordon B. Butler
A gnature) Agent (Print)
Name of Agent/Broker: Butler -Carson Insurance Agency
Address of Agent/Broker: 4505 82nd Suite 10
City/State/Zip: Lubbock TX 79424
AAgent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 80_ 6 ) 798-7979
•
Date: 4-28-98
CONTRACTOR'S NAME: Lubbock Building Services Inc.
(Print or Type )
CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: P• 0. Box 65600-194
Lubbock, Texas 79464
NOTE TO AGENT/BROKER
If this time requitement is not met; the City has the right to re)ect this bldtpropaaai and award e
r contract to another contractor. if you have any quiastlons eoncerning these requirements, please
contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) TTS -21165 --
BID #98069 -PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING RENOVATIONS AT 1010
9TH STREET
1
•.,.sw
r—
t
r
r
i
r
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on
proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the
contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of
any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide
coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words
or changes:
3
i
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal
requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to
report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing
of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this,
rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days
after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services.
r
No Text
r
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
CONTRACT
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 231 day of April. 1998 by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through Windy Sitton, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter
referred to as OWNER, and Lubbock Building Services. Inc. of the City of Lubbock. County of Lubbock and the
State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
BID #98069 - PARKS DEPARTMENT BUILDING RENOVATIONS AT 1010 9TH STREET - $64,889.00
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance
and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract
documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with
the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make
payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
A ST:
Secret
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
2�9 /)4)44— #lk-
s presentative
APPRO D AS TO FORM:
City Attorney
ATTEST:
Corporate Secretary
0AIA, C
i
CIUaB K, T O� ER)
By� --
MAYOR
CONTRACTOR:
LUBE BUILDING SERVICES, INC. '
By:
P TED AME: Je--cr% SiM t
TITLE:J 1,
P—r-t- 6cc
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Lubbock Building Services, Inc.
512169'", Ste. B-1
Lubbock,TX 79424 -
No Text
i
Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of
Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co-
partnership or corporation, to wit LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES INC who has agreed to perform the work
embraced in this contract, or their legal representative.
Whenever the word Owners Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will
inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may
be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors
will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor
or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder
for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to
herein as the "contract" or "contract documents".
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or
words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation
or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable,"
"Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's
Representative.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor.
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of
the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last
business address known to the party who gives the notice.
i
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall,.if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or
work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such
recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents
has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still
may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and
Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
13.
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding. the
Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the
Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems
said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract
documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary,
Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but
such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore.
The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades
will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless
destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be —
replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense.
2
t
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority
to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The
Owner's Representative shall, In all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work
and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the
r execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be
conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15)
calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection
!� by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
a
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
l It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may
deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said
material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall
furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the
proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and
.-� instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and
instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications
provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or
inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's
Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any
and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
7 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory
to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions
given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate
supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance
of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
r
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
r— Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
r" It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
�.. work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the
contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or
Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms
or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all
modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's
Representative and Contractor.
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work
to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work
required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform
Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion,
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or
men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is
also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of
any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such
structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public ,
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be
approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at
any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any
observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to
the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject
any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of
its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative
has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without
approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for
examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at
a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or
require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owners Representative may require Contractor to
furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons
competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated.
All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials
or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or _
consent of the Owner or Owners Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative,
be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective,
and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
4
7
t ,
E Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such
I^ inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance
( with the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not
(" in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written
! notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy
such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial
�.• action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either
before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a
claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of
work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual
expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered
by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
P11
' It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
�. the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
i methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced,
then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the
extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged
by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for
performance of the extra work.
I _ In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for
the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred,
together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age
�. 5
Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other
insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by
them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be
kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership
Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for
the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent
(15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit,
overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not
embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office
must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall
be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra
work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should
a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and
the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making
written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as
provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement
any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that
such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these
plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification
obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the
opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has
provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If
Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall
be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the
project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days
prior to the opening of bids:
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of
work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the
Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY
rThe Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment
and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
1 Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
1{, municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages,
expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or
contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection
with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any
manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject
matter of this contract.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an
Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given
F by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses,
are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to
supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors.
28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
^^ cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change.
All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and
its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance,
rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of
payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in
conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver..
The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor,
or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance
specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative,
shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular
project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof
of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor.
A. General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $500,000.00 Combined
Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury
Advertising Injury
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. --
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single _
Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $300,000.00 Combined Single Limit,
to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and
Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job
and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0.0% of the total contract price (100%
of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
E.' Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0.00 on all contracts with
coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability
coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00.
1. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance,; a certificate of authority
to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- --
83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's
or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor
Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
8
PON
4 undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with
the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -
operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to
provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a
project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of
Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on
the project, for the duration of the project.
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
G `
4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
7
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
,..
E
governmental entity:
C.
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
r
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage
I^
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
r.
for one year thereafter.
7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by
the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the
project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and
report lack of coverage.
a
9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
j••" of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
r
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; --
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will
provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the _
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance
carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance
Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative
penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the ~
Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence
of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the
insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability .thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
10
11�
i
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at
the address shown in the bid specifications.
f (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
�- cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
1 (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereofl contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a)
provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of
any coverage agreements;
(b)
provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c)
provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;.
(d)
obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental
entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for
all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e)
retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f)
notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type
and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and
any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be
the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services
related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation
insurance. This Includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or
materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the
project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512/440-3789 to receive
Information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your
employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to
provide coverage;" and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language:
"By signing this contract or providing or causing to be _
provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this
contract is representing to the governmental entity that all
employees of the person signing this contract who will
provide services on the project will be covered by workers'
compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that
the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of
classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
insurance carrier or, In the case of a self-insured, with the
commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the
Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties,
civil penalties, or other civil actions.";
(iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extenslon of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
r_
project;
12 .--
OU
31.
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
required by paragraphs (i) -(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to
the person for whom they are providing services.
DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of
1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS
OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless
against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way,
manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and fumishers of
machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract
and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or
waived.
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of
those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five
(5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain
unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a
sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such
indebtedness.
PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material
or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof.
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except
that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or
required in these contract documents by Owner, provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material
or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers,
agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's
Representative prior to bidding.
13
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form,
the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, .Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such
laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor
observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in
writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the
work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within
said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or
local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors
perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's
Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is,a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as
the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may
enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as
though embodied herein.
33. SUBCONTRACTING
The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this
contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required
in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as
provided by the contract documents.
34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in
this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified,
then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner
may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED
DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set
forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for
substantially completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial
completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages
the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount
agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and
is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach.
IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS
OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT.
14
I
35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall
be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as
shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution
shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this
contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that
when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may
direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the
construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
f The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the
Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE
The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid'in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and
G has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that
it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been
delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors
f employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public
enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all
t.., justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days
of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the
extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial,
and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided
herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
rIn executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such
work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in
securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except
where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in
which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such
stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated
r to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they
are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing
their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are
expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ
6 somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method,
payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
r+ 15
i
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be
liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without
limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees,
against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising
from or growing out of the performance of this contract.
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by
the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to
receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all
expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner
and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of
Owner's Representative.
41. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective _
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by —
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's
agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for
partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine
the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if
submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a
certificate for partial payment showing as completely -as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor
up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's
Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the
Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that maybe retained by
Owner under the terms of the contract documents. -
Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to
enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work _
performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said
partial payment is attributable.
16
r-�
43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31)
working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time,
if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's
Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding
the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete
the work within the time provided in this contract.
44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final
completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final
completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's
Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion,
Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final
completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the
obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or
warranties implied by law or otherwise.
f
i 45. CORRECTION OF WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
r on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and
E Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
r other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
!~ Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the
contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and
Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which
shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's
Representative.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify
the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of.
(a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the
(1" amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
�.» 17
47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's
Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner
shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right
under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by
Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's
Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed
denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It Is further agreed
that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor,
and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and
Owner's Representative, by Contractor.
48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR .
In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after
written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the
written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety
on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be
delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no --
further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required.
After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and
equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or
credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for
under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice
hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with
diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract
documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or r`
otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective
manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall
be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time
become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than
the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the
Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the
sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said
Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper
having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of
the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of
any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost
under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain
bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which
18
r would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be
credited therewith.
In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall
have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as
provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract
accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be,
shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would
have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract,
or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the
Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over
to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price,
r., and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time
N` designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of
the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided,
` however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of
such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to
the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the
r-� date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net
sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at
either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
r-• machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than
the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners.
The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted
by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this
paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise
of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies
�., available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in
paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth.
or- 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY
t
t The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually
performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be
liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the
project which is the subject matter of this contract.
.. 50. BONDS
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
r" $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved
r-� Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be
+ in effect until such bonds are so furnished. M
19
51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions
conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall
control.
52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to
direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and
vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or
effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's
Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
54. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition.
In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS
Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same
may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in.
any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the
Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the
City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a
Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in
the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project
or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts
and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least
twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and
provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If
the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5)
days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied.
In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper _.
performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage,
disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or
asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective
gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum
products or byproducts and/or asbestos.
20
No Text
Resolution No. 51 )1
March 14, 1996
Item #19
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of
per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public
i works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's
Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and
WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February
+. 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, and further updated by
Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8. 1987; and
WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the
I�
current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be
as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made
a part hereof for all intents and purposes:
Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades
Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction !
f
Exhibit C. Overtime Rate
Exhibit D: Weekend and Holiday Rate I
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem
wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and
` such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. +
j
k
rr
p
.I
�
r
F"
Passed by the City Council this 14th
ATTEST:
1
Betty M. Minson, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
I
Mary AndrWws, Managing Director of
Human Resources
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
i
afold Willard,"Assistant City Attorney
H W :da/ccdocs/pubworks. res
February 14, 1996
2
, 1996.
YOR
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft
Hou rlRate
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
10.00
Air Conditioner Installer
11.00
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
5.50
Asbestos Worker
8.00
Asbestos Supervisor
11.00
Bricklayer
11.00
Bricklayer -Helper
6.00
Carpenter
11.00
Carpenter -Helper
6.00
Cement Finisher
7.50
Drywall Hanger
10.00
Electrician
13.00
Electrician -Helper
6.00
Equipment Operator -Heavy
8.50
Equipment Operator -Light
7.50
Floor Installer
8.50
Glazier
8.00
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
9.00
Insulator -Helper
5.50
Iron Worker
8.00
Laborer -General
5.50
Mortar Mixer
5.50
Pester
9.50
Plumes
10.50
Plumber -Helper
6.00
Roofer
8.00
Roofer -Helper
5.50
Sheet Metal Worker
. 8.75
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
5.50
Welder -Certified
10.00
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Asphalt Heateiman
6.00
Asphalt Shoveler
5.50
Concrete Finisher
7.35
Concrete Finisher -Helper
5.75
Electrician
10.50
Flagger
5.50
Form Setter
6.50
Form Setter -Helper
5.50
Laborer -General
5.50
Laborer -Utility
6.25
Mechanic
7.25
Mechanic -Helper
5.50
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
7.00
Bulldozer
7.00
Concrete Paving Machine
7.00
Front End Loader
6.50
Heavy Equipment Operator
7.00
Light Equipment Operator
6.50
Motor Grader Operator
8.50
Roller
6.00
Scraper
6.50
Tractor
6.50
Truck Driver -Light
6.00
Truck Driver -Heavy
6.50
EXHIBIT C
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate.
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Weekend and Holiday Rate
The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate.
No Text
SPECIFICATIONS:
CITY OF LUBBOCK
PARKS BUILDING RENOVATION
1010 9th STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
FEBRUARY 1998
tisdel and associates
PZ� architects and engineers
3416 JOLET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79413 806-792-2824
MEMBERS AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
�klAGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
AGMArIICAL 4 ELZI RICAL OO[aUL M ENORG FltS
LUBBOCK AMAR=
3223 S. LOOP 289 SUITE 424 LUBBOCK. TEXAS 79423 806-799-0753
r
r
1
i
ii
CITY OF LUBBOCK PARKS BUILDING ADA RENOVATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
DIVISION2
02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02071
CUTTING AND PATCHING
DIVISION 3
04901
MASONRY RESTORATION
DIVISION 5
05500
METAL FABRICATION
DIVISION 6
06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 7
07242
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07901
JOINT SEALANT
DIVISION 8
08110
STEEL FRAMES
08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08305
ACCESS DOORS
08462
SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR
08710
DOOR HARDWARE
DIVISION 9
09255
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09310
CERAMIC TILE
09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09651
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09900
PAINTING
09950
WALL COVERINGS
DIVISION 10
10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PAGE
6
3
3
5
5
8
4
7
4
3
5
6
9
9
7
6
10
4
5
2
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. DIVISION 15
PROJECT NUMBER 98012 MECHANICAL
CITY OF LUBBOCK PARKS BUILDING ADA RENOVATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL ................. 1-8
15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES ............................ 1-4
15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS ................................. 1-6
15320 AIR DISTRIBUTION .................................. 1-3
15330 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ............................. 1-3
15500 EQUIPMENT ....................................... 1-2
15600 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 1-2
C
0„ 0-i"
i w
DWAYNE R. AGNEW
37645
124l0
Copyright 1994 AIA
SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
MASTERSPEC'
5/94
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building.
2. Patching and repairs.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective
demolition operations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged,
or to remain the Owners property.
B. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for
reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items In the same locations or in locations
indicated on drawings.
C. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected
storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original
locations.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to
remain the Owners property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall
be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractors option.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Proposed dust -control measures.
C. Proposed noise -control measures.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-1
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/94
D. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates
for each activity.
2. Interruption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress
of Owner's on-site operations.
5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building.
E. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or
mechanical conditions.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than _
72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any materials
suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify
the Architect and the Owner.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
1.8 SCHEDULING _
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION02070 - 2
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/94
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed
and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to the Architect.
E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in
structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures
during selective demolition.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
2.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during
selective demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when
authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services
during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities.
a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
B. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing,
and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting
and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
2.3 PREPARATION
A. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads,
streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
r
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around
closed or obstructed traffic ways If required by governing regulations.
r B. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and
facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.
1. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed
during selective demolition operations.
r C. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-3
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 5194
to separate areas from fumes and noise.
D. Provide and maintain interior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent
movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
2.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Use temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply
with governing environmental protection regulations.
B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level.
C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.
2.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as
indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and
as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on
lower levels.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before
starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during flame -
cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin4nfested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable `materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and
materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 'On-site storage or sale of removed
Items is prohibited.
9. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of
selective demolition operations.
B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with
construction to remain, using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven
impact tools.
C. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient Floor
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-4
err
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 5194
r
Covering Institute's (RFCD "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor
Coverings" and Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCi.
2.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective
demolition operations.
B. Patching is specified in Division 2 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction
to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions
extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and
appearance.
1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.
2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat.
4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, If necessary, to
achieve uniform color and appearance.
5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible.
F. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform
appearance.
2.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on-site.
B. Burning: Do not bum demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
2.8 CLEANING
A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.
B. Change filters on air -handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations.
2.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A. Remove existing items to allow new construction as indicated on the drawings.
r
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-5
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/94
B. Remove and reinstall the following:
1. Fluorescent Light Foctures as shown on drawings.
END OF SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-6
PW
{
r
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC
SECTION 02071 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
2/94(M1/94)
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for
alterations.
2. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching individual parts of the Work.
a. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to
Division 15 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures well In advance of the time
cutting and patching will be performed if the Owner requires approval of these procedures before
proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the
proposal:
1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and
Indicate why it cannot be avoided.
2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.
4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that
will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out -of -service. Indicate how long service
will be disrupted.
6. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect's
right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
P—
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would
change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio.
i� B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a
�''" CUTTING AND PATCHING 02701-1
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/94(M1/94)
manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch
operating elements or related components in a manner that would result In increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction In a manner that would result in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods
and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match
existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot
be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be
performed before cutting. If,unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective
action before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or
relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction activities and the subsequent fifting and patching required to restore
CUTTING AND PATCHING 02701-2
r
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/94(M1/94)
surfaces to their original condition.
f' B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer;
comply with the original Installer's recommendations.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not
In use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into
concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or
a diamond -core drill.
4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching
requires excavating and backfilling.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate Integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining
construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair
floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and
appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials as
specified.
a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire
unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second
coat.
4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of
uniform appearance.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before
applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
END OF SECTION 02701
CUTTING AND PATCHING
02701-3
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC
SECTION 04901 - MASONRY RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
8/96
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Repointing mortar joints in existing glazed CMU veener.
2. Repointing mortar joints in existing stone panel veener.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use.
Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements.
B. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Each type of mortar for pointing and masonry rebuilding and repair in the form of sample
mortar strips, 6 inches (150 mm) long by 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, set in aluminum or plastic
channels.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced masonry restoration firm that has completed work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled
with type and name of products and manufacturers.
B. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location, where grading and other required characteristics
can be maintained and contamination avoided.
D. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature
requirements for storage.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold -Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair and mortar -
joint pointing:
MASONRY RESTORATION
04901-1
Copyright 1996 AIA
MASTERSPEC
8/96
1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), heat mortar ingredients, masonry repair
materials, and existing masonrywalls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4
and 49 deg C).
2. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and 4 deg C), cover
completed Work with weather -resistant, insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair and
pointing.
B. Hot -Weather Requirements: Protect restoration work when temperature and humidity conditions
produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and patching materials. Provide artificial shade
and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with
temperatures of 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above.
C. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of surrounding masonry
and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in contact with exposed masonry and
other surfaces.
D. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion of the Work.
B. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence:
1. Rake out existing mortar from joints Indicated to be repointed.
2. Point existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored.
3. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair to prevent the intrusion of water and other materials
into the wall.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Type N masonry cement.
B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Colored -Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar color
indicated.
2. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges.
3. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible.
C. Water. Potable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Supply all necessary shields, barriers, glass protection or other precautions to properly
execute the work without damage to the surrounding area.
B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants,
MASONRY RESTORATION 104901-2
r�
I
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 8196
Fand surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry restoration work.
i
1. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit
for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of masonry restoration
work.
3.2 REPOINTING MASONRY
A. Rake out joints as follows:
1. Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-112 times their widths, but not less than 112
Inch (13 mm) or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar.
2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked -out joints to provide reveals with square
backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints
to remove dirt and loose debris.
3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints.
a. Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Do not use power -operated grinders without Architects written approval based on
submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality -control program and demonstrated
ability of operators to use tools without damaging masonry. Quality -control program
shall include provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to
worker fatigue.
B. Point joints as follows:
1. Rinse masonryjoint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing
application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off and joint
surfaces are damp but free of standing water.
2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths
greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 318 inch (9 mm) until a
uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint
hard before applying the next layer.
3. After joints have been filied to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in 3 layers with
first and second layers each filling about two-fifths of joint depth; third layer, the remaining
one-fifth. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next
layer. Where existing bricks have rounded edges, slightly recess final layer from face. Take
care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge
mortar.
4. When mortar Is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints, unless
otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing.
5. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for at least 72 hours.
3.3 FINAL CLEANING
A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and
foreign matter; use stiff -nylon or -fiber brushes and clean water, spray applied at a low pressure.
B. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.
C. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
END OF SECTION 04901
MASONRY RESTORATION 04901-3
i
k
Copyright 1997 AIA
SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
MASTERSPEC
5197
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel ladders.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
1 A QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced In producing metal fabrications similar to those
Indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete Inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded In concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site
in time for installation.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
7 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/S7
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Rolled-Stainiess-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
C. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying
with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no
asbestos fibers, or cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners
with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe2n 5, where built into exterior walls. Select
fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Machine Screws: ASME 618.6.3 (ASME 618.6.7M).
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME BI 8.2.3.8K.
F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.
G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B1 8.22.1 (ASME B1 8.22M). _
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B1 8.21.1 (ASME B1 8.21.2K.
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to --
sustain, without failure, a load equal to sbc times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and
equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/97
1. Material: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe2n 5.
2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738K
and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B-588, tumbl"ng type, class and style as needed.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
r- A. Shop Assembly. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent -metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
Impairing work.
D. Weld comers and seams continuously.to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
F. Cut; reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
G. Fabricate joints thatwill be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes
where water may accumulate.
H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where
possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk)
screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/97
2.6 STEEL LADDERS
A. General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages
as indicated.
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sideraiis: Continuous, 1/2 -by -2 -12 -inch (12 -by -64 -mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced
18 Inches (457 mm) apart.
C. Bar Rungs: 3/44nch- (19 -mm-) diameter steel bars, spaced 12 Inches (300 mm) o.c.
D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
E. Support each ladder attop and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or
bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3.
F. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded
to rung by a proprietary process.
1. Available Products: Subject to. compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Mebac; IKG Borden.
b. SLIP -NOT; W. S. Molnar Company.
G. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners, in the following locations:
1. Exterior.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below.
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. _
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC' surface -preparation specifications and ' environmental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning"
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, 'except those with galvanized finishes
and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
METAL FABRICATIONS 1 05500-4
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 5197
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal fabrications to In-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not
to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not
weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and
are for bolted or screwed field connections.
D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to
comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
r
�""' METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/94(M1/94)
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior frames and jambs.
2. Plastic -laminate countertops.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of
architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
D. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of
actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for
each type of material indicated.
1. Plastic laminates.
E. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Laminate -dad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern,
and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
F. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that
Indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-1
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/94(M1/94)
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and
quality to those required for this Project.
C. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified
In "Project Conditions."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is
completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support
woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements
on final shop drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units
of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported
and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type
of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior
woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product
characteristics indicated:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 2
V
i
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/94(M1/94)
r
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 made with phenol -formaldehyde resins.
C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required
by woodwork quality standard.
k
1. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Nevamar Corp.
C. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, Win dried to less than
15 percent moisture content.
B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME BI 8.6.1
for applicable requirements.
C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -N-105 for
applicable requirements.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hotdip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior wails
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt
devices for ddlled4n-place anchors.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard
and of the following grade:
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture
content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation
areas.
C. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid -wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick or
less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid -wood {lumber) members and rails: 1/16 inch (1.5
mm).
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to
{` Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment
"' INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402.3
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/94(M1/94)
and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming,
and fitting.
F. Shop -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where
located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating.
2.4 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following:
1. Grade: GP -50, 0.050 -inch (1.270 -mm) nominal thickness.
2.Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
a. Provide Architects selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in
the following categories:
1) Solid colors.
2) Patterns. _
3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
4. Core Material• Medium -density particleboard. .�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete
work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified
in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm)
C. for plumb and level (including tops).
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at
cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required _
for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/94(M1/94)
woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Calk space between
backsplash and wail with specified sealant.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 964nch (3 mm in 2400 -mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
G. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before
Installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish
coats, including stains and paste fillers If any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats
were applied In the shop.
H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that
ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 06402
�"'" INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC
SECTION 07242 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
11/96
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over masonry surfaces.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in system with elastomeric joint sealants.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exterior insulation and finish systems (EIFS) refer to exterior assemblies consisting of an inner layer
of board Insulation, an outer layer of a glassfiber-mesh-reinforced base coat applied directly to board
Insulation, and a textured protective finish coat. These assemblies are applied to supporting
substrates of construction indicated.
B. Designation PM, for class of EIFS specified in this Section, Is based on the classification developed
by EIMA.
C. Systems refer to Class PM EIFS.
D. System manufacturer refers to EIFS manufacturer.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide systems that comply with the following performance requirements:
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and
supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-
service conditions.
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies
behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal -
Insulating effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind it, including
substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.
B. Physical Properties of Class PM System: Provide EIFS whose physical properties and structural
i performance comply with the following when tested per methods referenced:
1. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 14nch- (25.4 -mm) thick EIFS; cured for a
minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking,checking, or loss of film Integrity after
K
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM
07242-1
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
exposure to 528 quarts (500 L) of sand when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A.
2. Accelerated Weathering Characteristics:' Sample of size suitable for test equipment and
consisting of 14nch- (25.4 -mm-) thick EIFS; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking,
checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 2000
hours when viewed under five times magnification per the following:
a. Either ASTM G 23, Method 1 or ASTM G 53.
3. Absorption -Freeze Resistance: Sample, 3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) in size, consisting of
14nch- (25.4 -mm-) thick EIFS coated on one side with base and finish coats, including
reinforcing mesh; cured for 28 days; and showing no visible change and negligible weight loss
when subjected to 50 cycles of 20 hours of freezing at 16 deg F (minus 8.9 deg C) and 4
hours of thawing in water at 75 deg F (23.9 deg C), plus or minus 10 deg F (5.5 deg C) per
ASTM C 67.
4. Mildew Resistance: Sample consisting of finish coat applied to 2-by-24nch (50.8 -by -50.8 -mm)
glass slides according to manufacturer's written instructions; cured for 28 days; and showing
no growth when tested per DOD MIL -STD 810E, Method 508.4 or per ASTM D 3273. -'
5. Salt -Spray Resistance: Sample, minimum of 4 by 6 inches (101 by 152 mm) in size,
consisting of 14nch- (25.4 -mm-) thick EIFS; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking,
checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 300
hours per ASTM B 117.
6. Water Penetration: Sample, 24 by 48 inches (609 by 1219 mm) in size, consisting of 14nch-
(25.4-mm-) thick EIFS; cured for 28 days; and showing no water penetration when tested per
ASTM E 331.
7. Water Resistance: Sample consisting of 1 -inch- (25.4 -mm) thick EIFS; cured for 28 days;
and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or
delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247.
8. Water -Vapor Transmission of Coating: Sample consisting of protective coating, including base
and finish coats plus reinforcing mesh; and showing minimum permeability greater than that
of insulation and a maximum permeability of 18 perms (1034 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) when tested
per ASTM E 96, Water Method, Procedure B. `
9. Water -Vapor Transmission of Insulation: Sample consisting of 14nch- (25.4 -mm-) thick
insulation showing maximum permeability of 1 perm (57 n g/Pa x s x sq. m) when tested per
ASTM E 96, Water Method, Procedure B.
10. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 24nch- {50.8 -mm) thick EIFS applied to 1/24nch-
(12.7-mm) thick gypsum sheathing, when tested per ASTM E 695; and showing no cracking
or denting with 12 impacts by 30 -Ib (14 -kg) impact mass, swung as a pendulum, from 6 inches
(152 mm) to 6 feet (1.8 m) at 64nch (152 -mm) increments.
11. Positive and Negative Wind -Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 by 48 inches (1220 by
1220 mm) in size, consisting of studs, sheathing, and 14nch- (25.4 -mm) thick EIFS; and
showing capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each component of EIFS specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of system Including plans, elevations, sections,
details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system and
construction penetrating it, termination details, and attachments to construction behind system.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts and small-scale samples consisting of units
or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each finish
choice indicated.
1. Submit sealant manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242-2
7W
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
showing the full range of colors available.
D. Samples for Verification: 244nch- (600 -mm) square panels for each finish, color, texture, and
pattern specified. Prepare samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by system manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers or a third -party agency approved by system
manufacturer certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements:
r 1. Extruded -polystyrene board Insulation.
2. Joint sealants.
1 G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating that materials
forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion
r— with joint sealants. Include joint sealant manufacturer's written interpretation of test results relative
to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to
obtain adhesion.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed systems similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and with a recons of successful in-
service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those
ti indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain materials for system from one source and by a single manufacturer or
by manufacturers approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with other system components.
D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide system assemblies and components with the following
fire -test -response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method
Indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per
ASTM E 84.
2. Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 450 or less when tested individually
per ASTM E 84.
3. Radiant Heat Exposure, Unrestricted installation: Tolerable level of incident radiant heat
energy of at least 12.5 kW/sq. m when tested according to the BOCA National Building Code.
4. Fine -Resistance Characteristics: Where Indicated, provide materials and construction identical
to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels intact and clearly
identifying products.
B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from the weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and
r,
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM
07242-3
r
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11196
other causes.
1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. `-
2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials
to Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area
of construction.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not instal system when ambient outdoor air and substrate
temperatures are 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and falling unless temporary protection and heat are provided
to maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) during installation of wet materials and
until they have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant, but for at least 24 hours after
installation.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall
assemblies, Including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealers, windows, and doors, are protected
against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not
allow water to penetrate behind EIFS.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering Class PM
systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Bonsai: W.R. Bonsai Co.
2. Dryvit Systems, Inc.
3. EIFS Inc. EnergexArdricon.
4. Finestone-Simplex Products Div.; a K2 Inc. Company.
5. Parex Incorporated.
6. Pleko Products, Inc.
7.- Quikrete Companies (The).' —
8. Senergy Div.; of Harris Specialty Chemicals.
9. Sto Corp.; Sto Finish Systems Div.
10. Stuc-O-Flex Intemational, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, board Insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish -
coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use
by system manufacturer for Project.
:a
B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Finish Coat: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from system manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and
patterns for type of finish coat indicated.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242-4
#""
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
C. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal Insulation with closed cells and
integral high -tensity skin, formed from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using HCFCs
as blowing agents to comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV; approved by system manufacturer for
material qualities, including corner squareness and other dimensional tolerances.
t 1. Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in thickness
Indicated but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) or less than that allowed by system
manufacturer.
D. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali -resistant, open -weave glass -fiber mesh treated for compatibility
with other system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile
strength of not less than 120 Ibfhn: (21 dN/cm) per EIMA 105.01, complying with ASTM D 578 and
the following requirements for minimum weight:
1. Not less than 42 ozJsq. yd. (142 g/sq. m).
E. Base -Coat Materials: System manufacturers standard mixture complying with the following
requirements for material composition and method of combining materials:
1. Job -mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, natural color;
clean, washed, silica sand complying with ASTM C 897 and system manufacturer's
requirements; alkali -resistant chopped glass fibers; and polymer -emulsion admixture for base -
coat use.
2. Factory -blended dry formulation of portland cement, natural sand aggregate, alkaline -resistant
chopped glass fibers, and dry polymer admixture to which only water is added at Project site.
3. Either job -mixed or factory -blended formulation indicated above.
F. Finish -Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following
requirements for material composition and method of combining materials:
1. Factory -mixed formulation of polymer -emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound
stone particles, and fillers.
2. Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic -based sealer for protecting finish coat.
G. Water: Potable.
H. Mechanical Fasteners: System manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant fasteners complete with
standard washer attachments; selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required
to resist design loads of application indicated; capable of pulling fastener head below surface of
insulation board; and of the following description:
1. For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide hammer -driven pin and predrilled
expandable nylon sheath.
Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with
system manufacturers written requirements, manufactured from zinc alloy and complying with
ASTM C 1063. Coordinate depth of accessories with thickness of base and finish coats required.
1. Control Joints: Prefabricated, one-piece type manufactured with expanded metal flanges,
formed to provide double -keying action with protective coating, extending only to face of
insulation, with removable tape on plaster face, and 1/44nch (6.4 -mm) joint sightline and
bellows configuration as indicated below:
a. Shallow Configuration: Bellows extends to face of insulation only.
!"' EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242-5
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
2. Comer Bead: Prefabricated small -nosed comer bead with expanded metal flanges extending
a minimum of 2-7/8 Inches (73 mm) from corner.
3. Casing Bead: Prefabricated one-piece type for attachment to surface of insulation or behind
Insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and, where attached behind insulation,
thickness of insulation.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Elastomedc Sealant Products: Provide system manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically
curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with Joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related
materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in "EIMA Guide for Use
of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB" and with requirements in Division 7 _
Section "Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below:
1. Low -modulus silicone sealant.
B. Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealant compatible with adjacent materials and
complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
C. Sealant Color: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Match finish -coat color of system.
2.4 MIXING
A. General: Comply with system manufacturers requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do
not Introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by system manufacturer.
NIx materials In dean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer
or discard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of system. Proceed with
installation of system only after unsatisfactory conditions'have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of systems.
Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats
on other work.
B. Protect system, substrates, and wall constructionbehind them from inclement weather during
Installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with system manufacturers written instructions for installation of system as applicable to
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242-6
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
r
r
° each type of substrate indicated.
B. Mechanical attach insulation to substrate
� IY by method complying with system manufacturer's written
requirements. Initially install sufficient number of fasteners to hold insulation board in place before
applying reinforcing mesh. Install additional fasteners after applying reinforcing mesh to comply with
,.. manufacturer's written requirements.
Space fasteners as indicated below:
a. Vertically: Not more than 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. or more than 12 inches (305 mm)
from bottom edge of starting course of insulation board.
b. Horizontally: Not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
C. Secure mechanical fasteners to masonry and concrete substrates so they penetrate
substrate 1 inch (25.4 mm) or more and recess flush with exterior surface of insulation
board.
2. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally.
Begin first course from a level base line and work upward.
3. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate Joints
so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high.
Offset Joints not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from comers of window and door openings.
a. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 Inches (100 mm) from aesthetic reveals.
4. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.
5. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously
even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between Insulation boards. If gaps greater than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without
using adhesive or other material
6. Cut Insulation to fit openings, comers, and projections precisely and to produce edges and
shapes complying with details indicated.
7. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun
exposure; smooth surface film created by extrusion process; do not create depressions deeper
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
8. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.
9. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and
between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to
produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and
reinforcing mesh.
10. Treat exposed edges of insulation board to comply with system manufacturees written
instructions.
11. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that
does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating.
C. install control joints at locations Indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following
criteria and approved by Architect:
1. For wall areas defined by the placement of control joints; area not to exceed 150 sq. ft. (13.9
sq. m).
2. At a maximum spacing of 10 feet (3 m) in any direction.
D. Install trim accessories at locations indicated. Mechanically fasten accessories to framing members,
masonry, or concrete.
1. Comer beads and control y
� joints may be attached to Insulation with threaded plastic fasteners
i'
`� EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242-7
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
when approved by system manufacturer.
E. Cover insulation with reinforcing mesh and fasten through insulation to framing members, masonry,
or concrete.
F. Apply base coat over and into reinforcing mesh in thickness specified by system manufacturer to
produce a flush, uniform surface with mesh fully embedded and prepared to receive finish coat.
G. Apply finish coat over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, In
thickness required by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching
approved sample..
1. Apply sealer coat over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by system
manufacturer.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with
Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB."
1. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and system
manufacturer's written Instructions.
2. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed.
3. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent
sealant from adhering to back of joint.
4. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately
after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal
5. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from
window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive systemcoatings.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer and system
manufacturer, that ensure system Is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 07242
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM
07242-8
f-
Copyright 1997 AIA
SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
MASTERSPEC M7
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof hatches.
B. Related Sections Include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for ladders and miscellaneous metal framing and
supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product Indicated. include construction details, materials, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturers color charts showing the full range of colors available
for roof accessories with factory -applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples In
manufacturers standard sizes, and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If finishes
Involve normal color or shade variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations
expected.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges
and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing Indicated.
2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for Installing units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720-1
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/97
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Roof Hatches:
a. Babcock -Davis Hatchways, Inc.
b. Bilco Company.
C. Bristolite Skylights.
d. Custom Curb, Inc.
e. Dur -Red Products, Inc. "
f. Goeller Enterprises.
g. Hi Pro International, Inc.
h. J. L. Industries, Inc.
1. Metallic Products Corporation.
J. Milcor, Inc.
k. Nystrom Products Co.
I. O'Keeffe's Inc.
M. Precision Stair Corporation.
n. Roof Products & Systems Corp.
o. ThyCurb, Inc,
p. Trimco, Inc.
q. Wasco Products, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 2098 for alclad alloy 30051-125 or alloy and temper
required to suit forming operations, with mill finish, unless otherwise Indicated.
B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M) alloy 6063-T52 or alloy and temper required to
suit structural and finish requirements, with mill finish, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M with G90 (2275) coating designation; commercial
quality, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Structural Quality: Grade 40 (Grade 275), where indicated or as required for strength.
D. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M with Class AZ -50 (AZA 50) coating, �-
structural quality, Grade 40 (Grade 275), or as required for strength.
E. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated.
F. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground
use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
G. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish
of material being fastened.
H. Gaskets: Manufacturers standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat
design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
I. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mii (0.4 -mm) dry film thickness per coating.
J. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-2
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/97
K. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint
surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to joint
y ` substrates indicated, O.
2.3
2.4
L. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel
application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
ROOF HATCHES
A. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-ibf/sq. ft. (1.9- kPa) external and 20-Ibf/sq. ft. (0.95 -kPa)
Internal loading pressure. Frame with minimum 94nch- (225 -mm-) high, integral -curb, double -wail
construction with 1-1/24nch (38- mm) insulation, formed cants and cap flashing (roofing
countertlashing), with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints. Provide double-wall cover {lid)
construction with 1- inch- (25 -mm-) thick insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip with corrosion -
resistant or hot -dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold -open devices, interior padlock
hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles.
B. Type: Single -leaf personnel access.
1. For Ladder Access: 30 by 36 inches (750 by 900 mm).
C. Material: Aluminum or galvanized steel, or in combination, at Contractor's option.
1. Finish: Prime painted.
A.
B.
FINISHES, GENERAL
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable If they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they
are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.5 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied
over it Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint
specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regatvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Baked -Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard
lwo-coat, baked -enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum
dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written
Instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720-3
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/97
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof accessories
withexisting roof structure to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that
combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting
structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward
and outward loading pressures.
B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing
Manual," unless otherwise indicated,
C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by
coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other
permanent separation.
D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing
cement to form a seal.
E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof
overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic
sealant.
F. Operational Units: Test -operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and
hardware. Adjust for proper operation.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal
coatings.
END OF SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-4
Copyright 1991 AIA
SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
MASTERSPEC
5/91(M1/94)
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
b. Joints of stonework set with mortar including copings and cornices.
C. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Tile control and expansion joints.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors.
C. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
3. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in file flooring.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PM" for sealing system
joints.
2. Division 9 Section "Tile" for sealing file joints.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain
watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and
maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of
joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
JOINT SEALANTS 07001-1
1
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required
for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting
of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant
applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in
construction with a record of successful In-service performance. _
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single
manufacturer for each different product required.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time,
and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with Installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4 deg Q.
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after
completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 2
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
e
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials, that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for
products of type indicated.
,
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
.� A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomedc
s sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements Indicated on each Elastomeric Joint
Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
r�
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in
Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the capability, when tested for
adhesion and cohesion under maiamurn cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the
specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in
compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated.
r B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomedc sealants that may be
Incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Elastomeric
Sealant Data Sheet.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each
Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex
C' sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and
protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width
existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively.
B. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint
movement of not more than 5
percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent.
J?" C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss
I measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than
25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent.
D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, latex joint sealants that may be
Incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant:
a. "AC -20," Pecora Corp.
b. "Sonolac," Sonnebom Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
C. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc.
2. Silicone -Emulsion Sealant:
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-3
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
a. : Dow Coming Corp., No. 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant.
2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding
strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in
unruptured state.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down
to -26 deg F (-32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive
tape where applicable.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant
to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests and field
tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces -
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
w
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant
performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-4
I
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply
with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved
for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tie, and similar porous joint substrate
surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these
methods to produce a dean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming
or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous
surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave
residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant
manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of
joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
I methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at
position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
C. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and
replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants
and joint fillers or back of joints.
D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are
installed.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-5
P �
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1J94)
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration Indicated, to eliminate
air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess
sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent
surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
F. installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant Immediately after removing
protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant
manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and tools that produce seal continuity
at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where
expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with
sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that
and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-6
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT
A. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES[1]
B. Base Polymer: Acrylic Terpolymer
C. Type: S (single component).
D. Grade: NS (nonsag).
E. Class: 12-1&
F. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
G. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: O
1. Use O Joint Substrates.
H. Products: "MONO", Tremco Sealant Systems.
END OF SECTION 07901
5/91(M1 /94)
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-7
t
w
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/94
SECTION 08110 - STEEL FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel frames.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for hollow -core and solid -core wood doors installed
In steel frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames In gypsum board
partitions.
4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
P*' Specification Sections.
1
B. Product Data for each type of frame specified, Including details of construction, materials,
dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.
{ _ C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and Installation of steel frames. Include details of each frame
type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and
roll installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
"i
D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details
and openings as those on Contract Drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSUSDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame
assemblies tested for fire -test -response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed
by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
7 STEEL FRAMES 08110 -1
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/94
A. Deliver frames cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors and frames. _
B. Inspect frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items
match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as
directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 44nch- (100 -mm) high
wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity
chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons Immediately. Provide
minimum 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: �.
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Ceco Door Products.
b. Deansteei Manufacturing Co.
C. Kewanee Corp.
d. Pioneer Industries. �-
e. Republic Builders Products.
f. Steelcraft. -
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial -quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying _
with ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M).
B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial
quality, or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed.
C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.04784nch- (1.2 -mm) thick steel sheet;
0.05164nch- (1.3 -mm) thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames. ..
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units.
2.3 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on r
Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.Fabricate frames of
minimum 0.04784nch- (1.2 -mm) thick cold -rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers.
2.4 FABRICATION
STEEL FRAMES 081`10-2
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/94
A. Fabricate steel frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle.
Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly Ide ntify work that cannot be
permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply
with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements.
roll,1. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads. Not more than 3/4 inch
(19 mm) at bottom.
a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80.
B. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either
cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet.
D. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply
with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
E. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
F. Locate hardware as Indicated on Shop Drawings or, If not indicated, according to the Door and
Hardware Institute's (DHD "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
t� A. Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease,
and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from
uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to
organic coating applied over it.
C. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1
acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide
a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data,
and as specified.
•a B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise Indicated. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and traced securely until permanent anchors are set. After
wail construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth
and undamaged.
r
STEEL FRAMES
08110-3
Copyright 1994 AIA MASTERSPEC 11194
1. In metal -stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In
steel -stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
2. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final Inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors
and frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
STEEL FRAMES 08110-4
r -
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11196
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1.'
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Solid -core doors with wood veneer faces.
N
1.3 SUBMITTALS
r,
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for
k
openings, and louvers.
` B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other
r pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door,
core, construction, finish, and other requirements.
x
C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings Indicated, based on
f I, testing according to NFPA 252.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written Instructions.
1. Individually package doors in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
.• 2. Individually package doors in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or
r'" FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC
concealed markings.
11/96
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative
humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the
remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the referenced quality standard
for Projects geographical location.
1.7 WARRANTY
r
A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner
of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be
in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form,
signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that
have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in a 42 -by -84 -inch (1067 -by -2134 -
mm) section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in
a 3 -inch (0.25 mm in a 75 -mm) span, or do not comply with tolerances in referenced quality
standard.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of Substantial
Completion:
a. Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Flush Wood Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
b. Buell Door Co.
C. Graham Manufacturing Corp.
d. Weyerhaeuser Co.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
2. Faces: Red oak, plain sliced.
3. Stiles: Same species as face.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-2
t .
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11196
f
2.3 SOLID -CORE DOORS
r
A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -2.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking at particleboard -core doors as follows:
a. 54nch (125 -mm) top -rail blocking, at doors Indicated to have closers.
b. 5 -inch (125 -mm) bottom -rail blocking, at exterior doors and doors indicated to have
kick, mop, or armor plates.
�..
C. 54nch (125 -mm) midrail blocking, at doors indicated to have exit devices.
B. Interior Veneer -Faced Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Core: Particleboard core.
2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed
before veneering.
C. Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral -core construction as required to provide fire rating indicated.
4 '
2. Blocking: For mineral -core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw -holding
capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated and as follows:
a. As necessary to eliminate need for through -bolting hardware.
E
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated -edge
construction with improved screw -holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile
t matching face veneer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate flush wood doors in sizes indicated for Project site fitting.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115 -W
series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
Ii
t PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
«� characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-3
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturers Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. _
1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below;
do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (32 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where
threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of
threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors.
D. Field -Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that. do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage
or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
r
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 108211-4
Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/93(M1/94)
SECTION 08305 -ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of access doors:
1. Wall access doors.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum board vralis and ceilings.
2. Division 9 Section "Tile" for ceramic file walls.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item In this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, Including details of construction
relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire -protection ratings (if required).
1. Include complete schedule, Including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling
construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one! source and by a single
manufacturer.
B. Size Variations: Obtain Architects acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary
slightly from sizes indicated.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified under "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
ACCESS DOORS 08305-1
Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 5l93(M1/94)
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acudor Products Inc.
2. Bar -Co, Inc. Div., Alfab, Inc.
3. Cesco Products.
4. Elmdor Manufacturing Co.
5. J.L. Industries.
6. Karp Associates, Inc. _
7. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
8. Miicor, Inc.
9. Nystrom, Inc.
10. The Williams Bros. Corporation of America.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 3668 commercial -quality, cold -rolled steel sheet with baked -on,
rust -inhibitive primer.
B. Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 (ASTM A 591 M), Electrolytic zinc -coated steel sheet with
Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting.
C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304 with No. 4 finish according to ASTM A 480
(ASTM A 480M).
2.3 ACCESS DOORS
A. Trimless, Recessed Doors for Gypsum Board Assemblies: Units consisting of frame with concealed
edge trim, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements:
1. Unit Size: 18"x24" - Field verify dimension of existing juntion box located behind access door
and size as required. --
2. Frame: 0.09384nch- (2.40 -mm) thick stainless-steel sheet.
3. Door: 0.06254nch- (1.59 -mm) thick stainless-steel sheet, recessed 1 inch (25.4 mm).
4. Concealed, Gypsum Board Edge Trim: 02984nch (0.76 -mm) zinc coated steel sheet gypsum
board edge trim formed to receive joint compound.
5. Hinge: Concealed, pivoting -rod type.
6. Locks: Flush to finished surface, screwdriver -operated cam.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
B. Recessed Panel Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
C. Locking Devices: Furnish number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic —
grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ACCESS DOORS 08305-2
Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/93(M1/94)
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door Installation,
Including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports,
inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must
be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned
with adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Install concealed -frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS 08305-3
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/97
SECTION 08462 - SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes automatic entrance door systems operating as follows:
1. Swinging operation.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections, including conduit and wiring.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open
r' the door.
s
B. Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing.
r■
k
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide automatic entrance door systems that have the following capabilities based on
testing manufacturer's standard units In assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project:
1. Operating Temperature Range: Provide automatic entrance door operators capable of
operating between minus 30 deg F and plus 140 deg F (minus 34 deg C and plus 60 deg C).
2. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and
maintain them in fully closed position.
3. Opening Force: Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements for locations
k indicated:
3
a. Exterior Doors: 15 Ibf (67 N).
4. Opening Force for Low -Energy Power -Operated Doors: Provide operators that require no
more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to stop door movement.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrance doors.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and
1"" SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08462-1
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/97
attachments to other Work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring.
C. Hardware Schedule: Organize schedule into sets based on hardware specified. Include name of .--
item and manufacturer, and complete designation of every item required for each automatic entrance
door.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of automatic entrance doors certifying that products
furnished comply with emergency exit door requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who Is an authorized representative of the automatic
entrance door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door operator through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Welding Standards: Comply with AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code—Aluminum."
D. ANSIBHMA Standards: Comply with the following:
1. ANSIBHMA Al 56.19, "Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors"
E. UL Standard: Provide power door operators that comply with UL 325.
F. Emergency Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify automatic entrance door openings by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.8 COORDINATION —.
A. Coordinate hardware with existing doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrance doors with hardware required
for the rest of Project.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work Include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Electromechanical -Operated Swinging Units, shall be equal to:
SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08462-2
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/97
a. LCN CLosers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company - power door operator #4620
2.2 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
�,.. A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door system, complete with
operators, controls, activation devices, safety devices, and accessories as indicated. Comply with
the following:
1. Configuration: Existing outward swinging door for two-way traffic.
I
B. Activation Devices: Activate doors by the following equipment:
r■
1. Wall push -plate switch.
2. Key switch.
2.3 DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and
movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance -free operation under normal
traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Comply with the following:
r" 1. Type: Power operated, complying with ANSVBHMA Al 56.10.
2. Connections: Provide connections for power and control wiring.
3. Adjustment Features: Operators shall be fully adjustable without removing entrance doors,
.� as follows:
a. Adjustable speed, Including opening, closing, back check, and latch check.
b. Adjustable time delay for length of time door remains open.
C. Automatic door re -open Kstopped while closing.
4. On/Off Feature: Provide on/off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator.
B. Electromechanical Operators: Self-contained overhead units, with power opening and closing
mechanism indicated below. Provide closing speed controlled by gear train and dynamic braking
action of electric motor, with manual operation and spring closing when power Is off. Provide
,r- operator action as indicated.
1- Closing Mechanism: Spring.
2. Mounting: Surface.
3. Manual Operation: Operation shall require less than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release a latch, 30 Ibf
(133 N) to set door In motion, and 15 Ibf (67 N) to fully open door when power is off, according
to ANSUBHMA Al 56.19.
2.4 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
` A. Wall Push -Plate Switch: Manufacturers standard semiflush, wail -mounted, door control switch;
consisting of round or square, flat push plate; of material indicated; and controlling actuator mounted
In recessed junction box. Provide engraved message as indicated.
1. Material: Stainless steel.
2. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open."
B. Key Switch: Manufacturer's standard recess -mounted, door control switch; consisting of key-
,...
�"" SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08462-3
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/97
controlled on/off/hold-open actuator, stainless-steel cover plate, and junction box.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other
than those indicated to be provided by automatic entrance door manufacturer.
B. Heavy -Duty Hardware: Provide units as indicated in size, number, and type recommended by
manufacturer for entrances required. Finish exposed parts to match door finish, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Emergency Breakaway Hardware: Provide release hardware that allows door to swing out in the
direction of egress to a full 90 degrees. Maximum force to open door shall be 50 Ibf (222 N)
according to ANSUBHMA A156.10. Interrupt operation of door operator while In the breakaway
mode.
D. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard mortise deadlocks with minimum 14nch- (25 -mm) long throw
bolt, complying with ANSUBHMA A156.5, Grade 1 requirements.
1. Mortise Cylinders: Match existing
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Signage: Comply with ANSIBHMA A156.10.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate automatic entrance door system components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses
specified and to comply with indicated standards.
B. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing
components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to
minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed
surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer
for this purpose.
D. Hardware: Install hardware, except surface -mounted hardware, at fabrication plant. Remove only
as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Installation
tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrance doors.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08462-4
i
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC
8197
r
1
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams, and other data to fabricators and Installers
of related work, as necessary for coordinating automatic entrance door installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with automatic entrance door manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless
more stringent requirements are indicated. Do not install damaged components.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer
for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Entrances:. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts.
1. Install surface -mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
D. Door Operators: Install door operator system, including control wiring, as follows:
1. Refer to Division 16 Sections for connection to electrical power distribution system.
E. Activation and Safety Devices: install control devices and wiring, including connections to door
operators, as follows:
1. Wali Switches: Provide push plates on both sides of opening as indicated.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Repair or remove and replace Work that does not comply with requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for weathertight
closure.
B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent
to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment,
and other moving parts.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after Installation. Remove excess sealant compounds,
dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, including limiting construction traffic, that ensure
automatic entrance doors are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08462
SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08462-5
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for
swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same
sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
r.. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors
for door hardware.
t.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
sections.
B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware,
J installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary
to show compliance with requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware Indicated, organize schedule Into
"hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on
floor plans and In door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
�^ 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where
acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the
Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop
drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other Information essential to the
coordinated review of schedule.
a
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-1
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final
Instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
r
D. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for
coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule.
1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged
through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation,
be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.
E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of
door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made
for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. .-
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities
in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door
hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an
experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and
Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final
Instructions in writing.
B. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA _
Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other
testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and
sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and
include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier
from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate
hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical
sets may be packed in same container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until
each is satisfied that count is correct.
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project
site).
E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control
handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion
of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
r
i
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Fumish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be Incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of
! finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are
Identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:
1 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one
I manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one
manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type
the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name
or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with
required fire -rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using
manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but In no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations
Indicated.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared
for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping
sheet metal screws, except as specifically Indicated.
D. Fumish screws for installation with each hardware Item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as
otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish
or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible
Including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
E. ' Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is dosed except to the
extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-
boits for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use
is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-
bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex
screw fasteners.
2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
C DOOR HARDWARE
08710-3
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be Installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and
frames, provide only template -produced units.
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements:
1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
3. For fire -rated wood doors install #12 x 1 -1/4 -inch (32 -mm), threaded -to -the -head steel wood
screws.
4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
2. Tips: Fiat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT)
Indicated.
D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for
doors 90 inches (2250 mm) or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (750 mm) _.
of additional height.
1. Fre-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches (2150 mm) or less
in height with same rule for additional hinges.
2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or
great-grandmaster),either new or integrated with Owner's existing system.
B. Equip locks with high -security cylinders that comply with performance requirements for Grade 1
cylinders as listed in ANSIBHMA A156.5 and that have been tested for pick and drill resistance
requirements of UL 437 and are UL listed. ._
C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide
individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related
locks.
r-
1. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key
symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5
grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
1. Deliver keys to Owner.
2.6 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the maufacturees standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock set (or push-
pull units if no latch or lock set).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91(M1/94)
B. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to Indicate hardware finishes are the industry
recongized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated In following applicable publications, except as specifically
Indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by
Architect.
1. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware Item in compliance with the manufacturer's Instructions, and recommendations.
Where cutting and fitting Is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of
surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -
mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates Involved.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate
as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors In accordance with industry standards.
E. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the
extent installation requirements are not otherwise Indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly oras
Intended for the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of
a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy
and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean
operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
c equipment.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware Installation.
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and
_ hardware finishes.
D. Six -Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the
Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door
control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the
following work:
1. Examine and re -adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors
and hardware to comply with specified requirements.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5
6
Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5l91(M1/94)
2. Consult with and Instruct Owner's personnel In recommended additions to the maintenance
procedures.
3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or
installation of hardware units.
4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) In the
performance of the hardware.
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware,"
hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.
HW -1
DOORS MARKED 101 - EACH TO HAVE:
1 OPERATOR 4620 STAT LCN
2 RF ACTUATORS 957 LCN
1 RF RECEIVER 931 LCN
1 KEY SWITCH KS920 US10B VON DUPRIN
1 MORTISE CYLINDER 41 US10B SARGENT
HW -2
DOORS MARKED 102,104 - EACH TO HAVE:
3 HINGES
TA2714 4.5 x 4.5 US10B
MCKINNEY
1 LATCHSET
28-10U15 LL US10B
SARGENT
1 CLOSER
EB1431-OX TB
SARGENT _
1 STOP
409 US10B
ROCKWOOD
1 KICKPLATE
10" X 34" US10B
ROCKWOOD
1 GASKET
S88D
PEMKO
HW -3
DOORS MARKED 103 - EACH TO HAVE:
3 HINGES
TA2714 4.5 x 4.5 USI OB
MCKINNEY
1 LOCKSET
76-28-10G04 LL US 10B
SARGENT
1 STOP
409 US10B
ROCKWOOD
3 SILENCERS
1229A
TRIMCO
HW -4
DOORS MARKED 105 - EACH TO HAVE:
3 HINGES
TA2714 4.5 x 4.5 USI OB
MCKINNEY
1 LOCKSET
76-28-10G04 LL US10B
SARGENT
1 CLOSER
EB1431-OX TB
SARGENT -'
1 KICKPLATE
10" X 34" USI OB
ROCKWOOD
1 STOP
409 US10B
ROCKWOOD
1 GASKET
S88D
PEMKO
END OF SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-6
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/95
r
SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
f and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Nonload-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for definitions of terms
for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
►^ materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined
d according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing
agency.
B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings indicated.
SUBMITTALS
F
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and Installation of control and expansion Joints
including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board
�-- assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise Indicated.
F
B. Single -Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel
products from a single manufacturer.
I
i
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-1
Copyright 1995 AIA
MASTERSPEC
2/95
C. Single -Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same
manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer
acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where fire -resistance -rated gypsum board assemblies are
Indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements:
1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA -600 "Fire Resistance Design
Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Gypsum board assemblies Indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification
of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack
gypsum panels fiat to prevent sagging.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying
and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less
than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less
than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not
exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during
hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
b. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
C. Unimast, Inc.
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-2
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/95
r
a. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
b. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
C. United States Gypsum Co.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated In
the Work where proprietary gypsum wallboard is Indicated Include, but are not limited to, the
following:
r-�
1. Firestop Type C; Georgia-Pacific Corp.
2. Fire -Shield G; National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
3. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core; United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:
1. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant coating.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and
doubled over to form 3M64nch- (5 -mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following
requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 0.0329 Inch (0.84 mm) as follows:
a. For head runner, sill runner, jamb, and cripple studs at door and other openings.
3. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Depth: 2-12 inches (63.5 mm) where indicated.
C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645 and
with 24nch- (50.8 -mm) deep flanges.
D. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).
E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to
substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for
applications indicated.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated In mabmum lengths available that will minimize
end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application.
1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm).
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
�` GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255-3
Copyright 1995 AIA
C.
2.4
MASTERSPEC
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies.
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) where indicated.
Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 and as follows:
1:
2/95
1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies and where indicated.
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Specified as base for ceramic tile.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with
ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement:
a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hotdip process or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
a. Cornerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated.
b. L -bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L -
bead where indicated.
C. U -bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of
joint compound. Use U -bead where indicated.
d. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot
opening.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations
of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application
indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use pressure -sensitive or staple -attached, open -weave, glass -fiber reinforcing tape with
compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint
treatment materials for application indicated.
C. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory -packaged vinyl -based products
complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory -mixed product.
a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and
face flanges of trim accessories.
b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
C. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-4
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 2195
r
i
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced
standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Spot Grout; ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommended for spot -grouting hollow metal
door frames.
C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
I 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick.
,., D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket insulation produced by combining
mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for
Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
1. Mineral -Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
2.7 TEXTURE FINISH PRODUCTS
A. Primer: Of type recommended by texture finish manufacturer.
B. Aggregate Finish: Factory -packaged proprietary drying -type powder product formulated with
aggregate for mixing with water at Project site for spray application to produce texture indicated
below:
1. Light orange peel finish at vertical surfaces.
2. At rooms A102, A105, A107 & A108 - Match existing texture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames,
t^ cast4n-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this
Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with
G ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing Installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies
r to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or
similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer or, if none available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum Construction
�^ Handbook."
d
3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
" A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where
gypsum board stud
r
"' GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255-5
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/95
assemblies abut other construction.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do
not vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings,
except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over
frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide
support for gypsum board.
1. Cut studs 12 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
2. For STC -rated and fire -resistance -rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing
around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed,
to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
D. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated.
1. Single -Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
F. install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum
board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. Frame door openings to comply with GA -219, and with applicable published recommendations of
gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws
either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for
cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
1. Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/24nch (12.7 -mm)
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.
3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
H. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as
required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads.
3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with
ASTM C 840 and GA -216.
B. Install sound -attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets
are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt
panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open
space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-6
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/95
r
supports or gypsum board back -blocking Is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges
against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other
than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible.
E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
.. F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
�^ G. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid -core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over
M 32 inches (813 mm) wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum
panels into frames.
H. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges
of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.
n, I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally.
1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in
area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit
profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/84nch- (6.4- to
9.5 -mm) wide joints to install sealant.
J. Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors,
as detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm) wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
K. Where STC -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind
control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant
including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's
recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through
gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing
standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
M. Space fasteners in panels that are file substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.
3.5 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
r^
l 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
Indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless
parallel application is required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies. Use maximum -length
panels to minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
r'" GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255-7
Copyright 1995 AIA
MASTERSPEC
2195
board.
B. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin -set ceramic file and similar rigid applied
wall finishes, comply with the following:
1. Install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels where indicated. Install with 1/44nch
(6.4 -mm) open space where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
2. Install gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat
surface except at locations Indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
C. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to
fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's
directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install comerbead at external comers.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type
with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated.
1. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange
can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install L -bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are Installed.
3. Install U -bead where indicated.
4. Install aluminum trim and other accessories where indicated.
D. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and in specific
locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, Interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board
surfaces for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not
requiring tape.
D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim
accessory manufacturer.
E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels' of gypsum board finish per GA 214.
1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level
of finish is required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies.
2. Level 2 where panels form substrates for file and where indicated.
3. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. -
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-8
p
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 2195
7
F. Use one of the following joint compound combinations as applicable to the finish levels specified:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Setting -type joint compound. FII (Second) Coat: Setting -type
joint compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready -mixed, drying -type, all-purpose or topping
compound.
G. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and
finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch
up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects
and ready for decoration.
H. Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first coat
of joint compound.
I. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound.
J. Finish water-resistant gypsum backing board forming base for ceramic tile to comply with
ASTM C 840 and gypsum board manufacturer's directions for treatment of joints behind tile.
3.8 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes according to texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer only
to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other surfaces indicated to
receive texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered spray
equipment, produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other
evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish
by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these
precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray
as recommended by texture finish manufacturer to prevent damage.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure
gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09255
r" GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-9
r
rM
6
Copyright 1995 AIA
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
MASTERSPEC
111'95
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Unglazed paver tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitious backer units Installed in
gypsum wallboard assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual file size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width
indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For file installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing Identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
B. Load -Bearing Performance: For ceramic file Installed on walkway surfaces, provide installations
rated for the following load-bearing performance level based on testing assemblies according to
ASTM C 627 that are representative of those indicated for this Project:
1. Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through 12.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
CERAMIC TILE
09310-1
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11195
1. Tile patterns and locations.
2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in file
substrates and finished file surfaces. _
C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections
of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and --
composition of file indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout
showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout Indicated.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with
requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed file installations similar
In material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of file from
.one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous
area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each
mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one
source or producer.
D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified In this Section
from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Stone thresholds.
2. Joint sealants.
3. Waterproofing.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.
C. Handle tie with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from '-
contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove
coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tie until construction in spaces is completed and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
CERAMIC TILE - 09310 - 2
r`
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products
installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed,
for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated In the ceramic file
Installation schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
r 1. Tile Products:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Dal -Tile Corporation.
C. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
e. United States Ceramic Tile Company.
2. Tile -Setting and -Grouting Materials:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
i b. Custom Building Products.
C. Dal -Tile Corporation.
d. DAP, Inc.
71 e. Laticrete International, Inc.
f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
7 h. TEC Incorporated.
t 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
r' A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide file that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
i Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to file sizes specified in Part 1
"Definitions" Article.
r" B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards
referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for file, grout,
and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance
characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architects selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns
i,
�'° CERAMIC TILE 09310-3
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
for products of type indicated.
2. Provide file trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
D. Mounting: Where factory -mounted file is required, provide back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies
as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.
E. Factory -Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed
surfaces of file against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of
petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed file surfaces.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Unglazed Paver Tile: Provide flat file complying with the following requirements`.
1. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Facial Dimensions: 7-7/8 by 7-7/8 inches (200 by 200 mm).
3. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with cushion edges,
B. Glazed Wail Tile: Provide flat file complying with the following requirements:
1. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-114 inches (108 by 108 mm).
2. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm).
3. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
4. Mounting: Factory back -mounted.
C. Trim Units: Provide tie trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with the
following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat file where applicable.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Thin -Set Mortar Installations: Coved.
b. Wainscot Cap for Thin -Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
C. External Corners for Thin -Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.
d. Internal Comers: Field -butted square comers, except with coved base and cap angle
pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.
2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS
A. General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles
Indicated to provide transition between file surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces.
1. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than 1t2 inch (12.7 mm) above
adjoining finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than
1:2.
B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior
use and with a minimum abrasive -hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241.
1. Provide white, honed marble complying with the Marble Institute of America's Group A
requirements for soundness.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-4
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
2.5 WATERPROOFING FOR THIN -SET TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Provide products that comply with ANSI A118.10 and the descriptions in this Article.
B. Polyethylene -Sheet Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product consisting of
composite sheets, 60 inches (152 mm) wide by a nominal thickness of 0.030 inches (0.76 mm),
composed of an inner layer of nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene sheet faced on both sides with
laminated, high-strength, nonwoven polyester material, designed for embedding in latex-portland
cement mortar and as the substrate for latex-portland cement mortar setting bed.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Polyethylene -Sheet Waterproofing:
a. Dal -Seal TS; Dal -Tile Corporation.
2.6 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composed as follows:
1. Prepackaged Dry -Mortar Wk. Factory -prepared rrfDdure of portland cement; dry, redispersible,
ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added
at Project site.
a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with
ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2.
2.7 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Latex -Portland Cement Grout; ANSI A118.6 for materials described In Section H-2.4, composed as
follows:
1. Factory -Prepared, Dry -Grout Mixture: Factory -prepared mixture of portiand cement; dry,
redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following:
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower.
b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 118 inch (3.2 mm) and wider.
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer
and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. One -Part, Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT,
G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide,
intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in -
r" CERAMIC TILE 09310-5
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. One -Part, Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealants:
a. Dow Coming 786; Dow Coming Corporation.
b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones.
2.9 . MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming file and grout
surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by file and grout
manufacturers.
2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'
written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of muting equipment, mixer speeds, muting containers, muting time, and other
procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where file will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting file are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of file
installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units
of work, and similar items located in or behind file has been completed before installing tie.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in file substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; N not
coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect. _
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone and are incompatible with tile-setfing materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a
CERAMIC TILE 09310-6
r""
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11195
drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tie floors installed with dry -set or latex-portiand cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI Al 08 series of file installation standards
for installations indicated.
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile -setting material manufacturer's
written instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL.
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of file installation standards
in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials
and to methods indicated in ceramic file installation schedules.
B. TCA installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.* Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic file installation schedules.
C. Extend file work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions,
edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tie without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of file abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned
joints. Fit file closely to electrical outlets, piping, fbdures, and other penetrations so plates, collars,
or covers overlap tie.
i;
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tie in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles
r on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tie work and center tie fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize file cutting. Provide uniform joint
widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between file sheets the same width as joints within tie
sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out tie wainscots to next full tie beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant -filled . joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,
and tie. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tie surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants
H. Grout file to comply with the requirements of the following tie installation standards:
1. For ceramic tie grouts (sand-portland cement, dry -set, commercial portland cement, and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI Al 08.10.
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
!^ A. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce a
i
CERAMIC TILE 09310-7
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install file over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that
it is watertight.
3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install tie to comply with requirements In the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation` Schedule,
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of file installation
standards.
B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Unglazed Paver Tile; 114 Inch (6.35 mm).
C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as
abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds In latex-portiand cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would
otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install types of tie designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile
Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -
bed standards.
B. Joint Widths: install tie on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tie surfaces so they are free
of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from file as soon as possible.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbonded, and otherwise defective file work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and —
Installer, that ensure file is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
3.8 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Ceramic Tile (C.T.) Floor Installation: Where Interior floor installations of this designation are
Indicated, comply with the following:
1. Tile Type: Unglazed paver tie located in Men's Al 04 & Women's A105
CERAMIC TILE 1 09310-8
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
2. Installation Method: TCA, Thin -set, #F122-95 (membrane bond coat over concrete subfloor,
waterproof membrane sheet, and latex-portland cement mortar bond coat).
3. Installation specification ANSI A108.5
4. Setting Bed and Grout: Latex portland cement.
3.9 CERAMIC TILE WALL INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Ceramic Tile Wall Installation: Where interior wall Installations of this designation are indicated,
comply with the following:
1.Tile Type: Glazed ceramic tile.
2. Installation Method: TCA W243-95 Latex Portland Cement Mortar (thin -set mortar bonded to
water-resistant gypsum board on metal studs).
3. Setting Bed and Grout:
a. Latex-portland cement mortar. ANSI All 18.4
b. Latex-portland cement grout. ANSI A118.6
END OF SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
09310-9
A-
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
11/96
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling -mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling -mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers; and
special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with
adjoining construction.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch - 1 foot (1:48).
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels or
sections of acoustical panels, suspension systems, and moldings showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each type of ceiling assembly indicated.
1.4 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
In-service! performance.
B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-1
r
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site In original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture
content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in anyway.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not Install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied
for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subjectto compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated for each designation in the Acoustical Panel
Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that
comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and
light reflectances, unless otherwise Indicated.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product
type.
C. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard
antimicrobial solution consisting of a synergistic blend of substituted ammonium salts of alkylated
phosphoric acids admixed with free alkylated phosphoric acid that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and
gram -positive and gram-negative bacteria.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-2
LM
7'
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
D. Panel Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule
at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM E 1264 classifications.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension
° systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C 635 requirements.
s B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical
Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3.
C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's
standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High -Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for
Severe Environment Performance" where high -humidity finishes are indicated.
D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung,
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc -Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Nickel -Copper -Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel -copper -alloy UNS No. N04400.
3. Size: Select wire diameter so Its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table
1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.1064nch-
(2.69-mm) diameter wire.
F. Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile Indicated or, If not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge -details and suspension
systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed
flanges of suspension system runners.
1. Baked -Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals;
r Chemical Finish: add -chromate -fluoride -phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as
specified below). Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and
° baking and for minimum dry film thickness.
a. Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard thermosetting coating system with a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.8 to 1.2 mils (0.02 to 0.03 mm).
b. Color: Match color of finish on flanges of suspension system surfaces.
2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. USG Interiors, Inc.
j G. Hold -Down Clips for Non -Fre -Resistance -Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings consisting of
acoustical panels weighing less than 1 ib/sq. ft. (4.88 kg/sq.-m), provide hold-down clips spaced 24
Inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.
1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-3
t
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
IT "e.
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect
ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast -in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other Sections.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with
layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per
manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
2. U.B.C: s "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings": U.B.C.
Standard 25-2.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that Interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes
or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support
ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum
of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or
other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate
or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers
to cast4n-place hanger inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or drilled -in anchors that extend
through forms into concrete.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches
(200 mm) from ends of each member.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095111 -4
r
s
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11196
a
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and
not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8 Inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect
securely.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Y '
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners
and edge moldings. Scribe and cat panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
1. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
2. install hold-down clips In areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction,
and for fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written
Instructions, unless otherwise indicated or required.
3. Protect lighting fixtures and air duds to comply with requirements indicated for fire -resistance -
rated assembly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor
finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and
repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
3.5 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE
A. Water -Felted, Mineral -Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling, Type W: Where this
designation is Indicated, provide acoustical panels, treated with antimicrobial solution, and complying
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-5
with
the following: following:
1.
Products: Available products include the following:
a. USG; Auratone Omni; Product #345; Class A
b. Armstrong; Cortega
t.
Product #769; Class A
2.
Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows:
a
a. Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water -felted.
3.
Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation, as specified by product designation.
4.
Color: White.
5.
Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 1.
6.
Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.50 - NRC 0.60.
OM
7.
Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 40.
8.
Edge Detail: Square.
9.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
„
i
10.
Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 1220 mm).
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-5
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/96
B. High -Density Ceramic -Base Acoustical Panels with Scrubbable Finish for Acoustical Panel Ceiling
Type "B": Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels, treated with antimicrobial
solution, and complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. USG; Omni ClimaPlus; Product #990; Class A.
b. Armstrong; Fine Fissured RH90; Product #1729; Class A.
2. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type XX, other types; described as high-
density, ceramic -base panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive
fumes.
3. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation CD perforated, small holes and
fissured.
4. Color: White.
5. Light Reflectance Coefficient Not less than LR 0.80.
6. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.60.
7. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 40.
8. Edge Detail: Square.
9. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
10. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
C. Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type "A": Where this designation is indicated,
provide acoustical panel ceiling suspension system complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. USG; Donn Suspension Systems; #DX24.
b. Armstrong; Prelude 7300 Series.
2. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G01 (2001) coating designation, with
prefinished 15/164nch- (24 -mm) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows:
a. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system.
b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type, as standard
with manufacturer.
C. Face Design: Flush face.
d. Cap Material: Steel sheet.
e. Cap Finish: Painted White.
D. Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type "B": Where this designation is indicated, provide
acoustical panel ceiling suspension system complying with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. USG; Donn Suspension Systems; #DXLA
b. Armstrong; Prelude 7300 Series.
2. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G01 (2001) coating designation, with
prefinished 15/164nch- (24 -mm) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-6
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 11196
e. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system.
b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type, as standard
with manufacturer.
C. Face Design: Flush face.
d. Cap Material: Aluminum sheet.
e. Cap Finish: Painted White.
END OF SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-7
i
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5196
SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following:
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
2. Resilient wall base and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a recons
of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site In manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each
bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling
Instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless
longer conditioning period Is recommended In writing by manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1 09651-1
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in
spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least
48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time
periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C)
or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
Installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended
in writing by manufacturer.
D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
pattern, class, wearing surface, and size of resilient file flooring installed.
2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule at the
end of Part 3.
2.2 RESILIENT TILE
A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066 and with requirements specified
in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS -W-40, Type I and with requirements specified
in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
B. Rubber Accessory Moldings: Products complying with requirements specified In the Resilient Tile
Flooring Schedule.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651-2
t:
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation
provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type ,recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with
Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and
conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3.3
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
TILE INSTALLATION
A.. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's written Installation instructions.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at
opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal
less than one-half of a file at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons In the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken,
cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles In basket -weave pattern with grain direction altemating in adjacent tiles.
"' RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651-3
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including
built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining
marking device.
G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with
tile manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and
adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install resilient accessories according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
3. Do not stretch base during installation:
4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
S. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without
whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips
perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without
removing more than half the wall base thickness.
6. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an
Inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back
of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with
adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
r--
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient
product manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.
4. Damp -mop floor to remove marks and soil.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651-4
P"
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations
and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection
methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and
surface blemishes, if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover products Installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until
Inspection for Substantial Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.6 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SCHEDULE
A. Vinyl Composilion Tae (VCT): Where this designation is indicated, provide vinyl composition floor tile
complying with the following:
1. Products: As follows:
a. Azrock: Futura / Custom Cortina.
b. Armstrong; Standard Excelon, imperial Texture.
C. Tarkett; Basics, Expressions, Keystone, Classics.
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and
patterns produced for file complying with requirements indicated.
3. Class: Class 1 (solid -color tile).
4. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
5. Thickness: 1/8 inch (32 mm).
6. Size: 12 by 12 Inches (304.8 by 304.8 mm).
B. Rubber Walt Base: Provide rubber wall base complying with the following:
1. Products: As follows:
s. Shall be equal to Roppe Corp.
► 2. Color and Pattem: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of colors and
patterns produced for rubber wall base complying with requirements indicated.
3. Style: Cove with top -set toe.
4. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch (32 mm).
5. Height: 4 inches (101.6 mm).
�., 6. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219.2 mm) long or coils in lengths standard with
manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet (2926 m).
JI 7. Outside Corners: Job formed.
8. Inside Comers: Job formed.
S. Surface: Smooth.
i
P'* RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651-6
Copyright 1996 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/96
C. Rubber Accessory Molding: Provide rubber accessory molding complying with the following:
1. Products: As follows:
a. Shall be equal to Roppe Corp. #159
2. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for rubber
accessory molding complying with requirements indicated.
3. Product Description: Reducer strip for resilient flooring, file and carpet joiner.
4. Profile and Dimensions: As specified by product designation indicated above.
END OF SECTION 09651
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09651-6
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8195
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
2. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified In other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not
to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a
surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not
schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not Indicate color or finish, the Architect will select
from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color
coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components:
a. Metal toilet enclosures.
b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
C. light fixtures.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Ceiling plenums.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
PAINTING 09900-1
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC: 8/95
b. Linkages.
C. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code -
required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board.
4. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings.
5. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and
16, respectively.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an
85 -degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at
a 60 -degree meter.
3. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a
60 -degree meter.
4. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when
measured at a 60 -degree meter.
5. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60 -
degree meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material
and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed
for use.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available
for each type of finish -coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. _
C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen,
color, and texture are achieved.
PAINTING 09900 2 .—
a'
,
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8195
l 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample
for location and application.
3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only:
a. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-84nch (100 -by -200 -mm) samples of
'.., natural- or stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
b. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 44nch- (100 -mm-) square samples of flat metal and two
84nch- (200 -mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar In material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful
In-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system
from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deriver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following Information:
1.
Product name or title of material
2.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3.
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5.
Thinning instructions.
6.
Application instructions.
7.
Color name and number.
8.
VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used In storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and
health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).
rw C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
} temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application
'' PAINTING
09900-3
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95
and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint
schedules.
C. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use
of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:
1. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
2. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S -W).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are
compatble with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,
as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. I
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be
acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or
materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion
of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturers material data and
certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be
performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility
of the total system for various substrates. On request, fumish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
PAINTING 09900-4
d
e
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8J95
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates
primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,
and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is Impractical or impossible
because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that
could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
Instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits,
and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or
other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and
Imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when
dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends,
faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and
paneling.
C. When transparent finish is required, backpdme with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish
or sealer immediately on delivery.
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC)
recommendations.
a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
b. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -
brush, dean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the
same primer as the shop coat.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet
r
metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
PAINTING 09900-5
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95
D. Previously Coated Surfaces:
1. Remove surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale dirt, foreign matter,
rust, mold, mortar, efflorence, and sealers to assure sound bonding to the tightly adhering old
paint.
2. Glossy surfaces of old paint films must be clean and dull before repainting. Wash with an
abrasive cleanser or wash thoroughly and dull by sanding, as recommended by the paint
manufacturer.
3. Spot prime any bare areas with an appropriate primer.
4. Check for compatibility by applying a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering
at least two to three square feet. Allow to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM
D3359. if the coating system is incompatible, complete removal is required (per ASTM 4259.)
E. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
F. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats —
of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide
sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. .
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Appy paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and —
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental
to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, _
convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. —
Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment
or furniture with prime coat only. =
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through —
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. —
9. Finish interior of wail and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. -
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
PAINTING 09900-6 "-
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended
bythe manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow suffident time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feet sticky under moderate
thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat
to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
G. Transparent (Cleat) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even
luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel,
nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site.
PAINTING 09900-7
f
Copyright 1995 AIA
MASTERSPEC
8/95
1. After completing painting, dean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint
by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
K11
A.
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop -primed items.
1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust -inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
1) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Extedor Rust Inhibitive Steel
Primer.
2) SW: DTM Acrylic Primer / Finish.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic -latex enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).
1) PPG: 78 Line Sun -Proof Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex. House and
Trim Paint.
2) SW: A-100 Exterior Satin.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex -based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) PPG: 17-10 Quick -Drying Interior Latex Primer -Sealer.
2) SW: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Wali Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, Interior enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).
1) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo -Lustre
!A
PAINTING 09900-8 "'
}
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95
Semi -Gloss Latex.
2) SW: EverClean Interior Latex Semi -Gloss.
B. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new, Interior wood
surfaces:
1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic -latex -based, interior wood undercoater, as recommended
by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) PPG: 6-755 Speedhide Interior Water -Based Undercoater.
2) SW: ProMar Classic Latex Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading
tate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).
1) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo -Lustre
Semi -Gloss Latex.
2) SW: EverClean Interior Latex Semi -Gloss
C. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new, interior woodwork:
1. Alkyd -Based, Satin-Vamish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd -based, clear -satin varnish over
a sealer coat and an alkyd -based, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.
a. Filler Coat: Paste -wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) PPG: None required.
2) S -W: Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler.
b. Stain Coat: Alkyd -based, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended
by the manufacturer.
1) PPG: 77-302 Rez Interior Semi -Transparent Stain.
2) S -W: Oil Stain A-48 Series.
C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate) recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick -Drying Sealer and Finish.
2) S -W. ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3.
d. First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd -based or polyurethane vamish, as recommended
by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
1) PPG: 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear.
2) S -W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91.
D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer.
PAINTING
09900-9
i
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/95
a. Primer: Quick -drying, rust-inhib'five, alkyd -based or epoxy -metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
1) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel
Primer.
2) SW: DTM Acrylic Primer / Finish.
b. Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than
1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
1) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo -Lustre
Semi -Gloss Latex.
2) SW: ProMar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss.
END OF SECTION 09900
PAINTING 09900-10
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95
SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming wall surfaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item In this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability,
fade resistance, and flame -resistance characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type). Indicate seams and
termination points.
D. Samples for initial selection In the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
1. Wall Covering Material: Full -width sample, not less than 36 inches (914 mm) long, from dye
lot used for the Work.
a. Submit sample with specified treatments applied.
b. Mark top and face of material.
C. Show complete pattern repeat.
E. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products comply
with specified requirements.
G. Maintenance data for wall covering to Include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r WALL COVERINGS 09950-1
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful In-service
performance.
B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface -burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed
and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominallydry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained
at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot -candies (160 lux)
is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.
C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each
wall covering Product Data sheet at end of this Section.
B. VINYL WALL COVERING
1. Vinyl Wali Covering Standard: FS CCC -W -408A and CFFA. W -101-A, Type 11, Medium Duty.
2. Total Weight: 21 oz. PLY, 14 oz. PSY.
3. Width: 53154".
4. Backing Material: Osnaburg.
5. Stain -Resistant Coating: "KoroKlear" protective coating.
6. Products: Equal to Komeal Walicoverings Raphael, Type 11, Class A.
7. Color and pattern as selected by the Architect.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. General: Mildew -resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood veneer wall covering and
substrate application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
WALL COVERINGS 09950-2
r
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5195
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Liner. Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall covering
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wail covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil,
grease, incompatible primers, and dirt.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks,
and defects.
1. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust -inhibitive zinc primer.
3. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry
units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
4. Prime new gypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer. See
Division 9 - Painting
5. Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity.
D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine
sandpaper.
E. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form
smooth wrinkle -free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wail covering installation until wall
liner has dried.
F. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not
less than 24 hours before installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and
comers only.
C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps.
D. Match pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finish floor.
WALL COVERINGS 09950-3
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/95
E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75
mm) from inside comers. No horizontal seams.
F. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
G. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
END OF SECTION
WALL COVERINGS 09950-4
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC
SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
11/95
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Steel, color -coated finish.
2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
3. Screen Style: Wall hung.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse shelves,
and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details
of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors,
hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturees color charts consisting of sections of actual units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or
screen indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on 6-
inch- {150 -mm) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
i
"" TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-1
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products _
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Sanitary Partition Corp.
2. Ampco Products, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
5. MASCO; Flush -Metal Partition Corp.
6. Metpar Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed
surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration, telegraphing of core
material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Steel Sheets for Color -Coated Finish: Provide mill-phosphatized steel sheet that is leveled to
stretcher -leveled flatness complying with the requirements of standards indicated below:
1. Electrolytically Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 (ASTM A 591M), Class C, of the
following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm).
b. Panels and Screens: 0.0299 inch (0.75 mm).
C. Doors: 0.0299 inch (0.75 mm).
d. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.0747 inch (1.9 mm).
2. Hot -Dip Galvanized or Galvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M), in
manufacturer's standard coating designation and of the following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
b. Panels and Screens: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
C. Doors: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
d. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.079 inch (2.0 mm).
C. Core Material for Metal -Faced Units: Manufacturers standard sound -deadening honeycomb of resin -
impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) --
minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than
0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
E. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U -brackets for attaching panels and screens to
walls and pilasters of the following material: _
1. Material: Chrome -plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear -anodized aluminum.
F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturers standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories of the following material:
1. Material: Chrome -plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear -anodized aluminum.
G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturers standard continuous, extruded -aluminum head rail with antigrip
profile in manufacturers standard finish.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1 10155-2
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
r
H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturers standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -
plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type
t' bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized or other rust-
resistant,
ustresistant, protective -coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system.
Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment -mounted hardware, accessories,
and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Metal -Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core
material and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal
corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth.
C. Overhead -Braced -and -Floor -Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -
resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions.
` Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes
at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
D. Wall -Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment
panels, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide metal -faced screens with Integral full -height flanges for attachment to wall.
E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 244nch- (610 -mm-) wide in -swinging doors for standard
toilet compartments and 364nch- (914 -mm-) wide out -swinging doors with a minimum 324nch- (813 -
mm) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at
any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit with combination
rubber -faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that
comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments
indicated to be handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to
prevent door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumpers at out -swinging doors or
entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at out -swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments Indicated to be handicapped accessible.
2.4 ZINC- OR ZINC -ALLOY -COATED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations relative to applying finishes.
B. Color -Coated Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with coating
manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
1. Color: One color In each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
i'
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-3
i
Copyright 1995 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/95
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturers written installation Instructions. Install units rigid, straight,
plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 12 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and
panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and wails. Secure units in position with
manufacturers recommended anchoring devices.
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and
bottom of panel Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or file joints.
Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead -Braced -and -Floor -Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb,
and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors
and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturers written instructions and to suit
supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral Impact.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturers written
Instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approbmately 30
degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors and swing doors
in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-4
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97
SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 Section "Toilet Compartments" for compartments and screens.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions,
profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory
specified.
B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation
Instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
D. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for
units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for
access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of
accessories.
B. Deriver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying
the Work.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 108011 -1
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to
replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated.
1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
d. Bradley Corporation.
e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
f. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be Incorporated into
the Work Include, but are not limited to, those Indicated in this section.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312 -inch (0.8 -mm) minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise Indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes,
forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings.
C. '. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359 -inch (0.9 -mm) minimum
nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (2180).
E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus
chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
F. Baked -Enamel Finish: Factory -applied, gloss -white, baked -acrylic -enamel coating.
G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering,
electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD -M-411.
H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hotdip galvanized after fabrication.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/97
I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.3 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS
A. Paper Towel Dispenser. Provide stainless-steel paper towel dispenser complying with the following:
1. Products: Simllarto ASI NO. 0210.
2. Surface -Mounted Type: Sized for minimum of 300 C -fold or 400 multifold .paper towels
without using special adapters; with hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset; and with refill
indicators that are pierced slots at sides.
2.4 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS
A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Provide toilet tissue dispenser complying with the following:
1. Products: Similar to ASI #0030
2. Type: Roll -in -reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset
3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage
4. Material: Stainless steel.
5. Operation: Theif resistant spindles.
6. Capacity: Designed for 54nch- (127 -mm-) diameter -core tissue rolls
2.5 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS
A. Surface -Mounted Type: Fabricate of stainless steel with seamless exposed walls, tightly self-closing
top cover and locking bottom panel with continous, stainless steel piano hinge.
1. Provide one at each stall in Women's A103
2.6 SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Soap Dispenser: Provide soap dispenser complying with the following:
1. Products: Similar to Bradex Model 6322.
2. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Deck Mounted: Piston -and -spout -type unit with minimum 16 -oz. (473 -
mL) capacity, polyethylene reservoir concealed below deck; brightly polished stainless-steel
piston and 44nch-(101.6-mm-) long spout; and chrome -plated deck escutcheon.
a. Mounting: Designed for mounting on lavatory deck.
b. Soap Valve: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form.
3. Provide one at each lavatory.
2.7 GRAB BARS
A. Grab Bar: Provide stainless-steel grab bar complying with the following:
1. Stainless -Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
2. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 Inches (38 mm) for heavy-duty applications.
!" ' TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-3
Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 2197
5. Clearance:1412 inch (38 mm) clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
6. Provide Grab bars at each handicapped toilet stall
2.8 MIRROR UNITS
A. Mirror Unit: Provide mirror unit complying with the following:
1. Products: Similar to ASI No. 0620 - 24'X36" in Men's A104 & 48"x36" in Women's Al 03.
2. Stainless -Steel, Channel -Framed Mirror. Fabricate frame from stainless-steel channels In
manufacturer's standard satin or bright finish with square comers mitered to hairline joints and
mechanically interlocked.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. General: One, maximum 1-124nch- (38 -mm) diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo,
as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not
exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped
nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and
joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel
hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction,
without mitered comers. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge.
Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D. Framed Glass -Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass -mirror units to accommodate glass edge
protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant --
glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation.
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) and full mirror
size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler
material.
E. Mirror -Unit Hangers: Provide mirror -unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft-
resistant
heftresistant installation, as follows:
1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall -hanger device with spring -action locking mechanism to hold
mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
2. Heavy-duty wail brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices
requiring a special tool to remove.
F. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate Indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-4
i
Copyright 1997 AIA
MASTERSPEC
2197
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or
screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written
Instructions for substrate indicated.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf (1112 N), when tested according
to method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective Items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10801-5
f
SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
CHECKING DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the
drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or
omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor
with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets
or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required
by the complete contract documents.
GENERAL:
In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be
run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required
to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily
workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and
ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating
from these standards.
All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in chases in finished areas,
except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run
concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed.
Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as
connections to equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and
elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required.
The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes
before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity
with these details. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general
construction to precede that general construction.
The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations,
etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The
Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural
conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of
installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an
integrated, satisfactorily operating installation.
The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact
location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings,
equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation
with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the
Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner.
�,, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-1
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space.
Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions
than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before
submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this
clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense.
The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any
way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the
work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor
before the work proceeds.
Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in
order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following
order shall govern:
1 Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures,
diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site.
2. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
3. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would
not be impaired by bends and offsets.
Piping and ducts serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner.
Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is
of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat
and inconspicuous manner.
Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention
before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes
and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment.
The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the
accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to
accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not.
Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these
documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 and that work is not indicated on the
respective "M" or "P" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before
bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall _
install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications.
DIMENSIONS:
Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including
elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation
will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on
the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for
consideration before proceeding with the work.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-2
INSPECTION OF SITE:
The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical installations. The bidders
for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and
thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in
removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and
underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute
grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the
existing installations and/or installing any new work.
ELECTRICAL WIRING:
All electric wiring will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each
section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16,
shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet
boxes.
Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the
Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of
exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and
phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur
between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:
All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the
manufacturer.
i MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
r- All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be
j free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have
established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label.
Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall
submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding.
The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution,
together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the
material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials
r may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to plumbing brass, grilles, registers,
ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of
equipment.
The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be
responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the
job.
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds,
and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract.
., GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-3
The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done
according to the best practice of the trade.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL:
Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has
been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is
of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the
named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole
judge of equality.
The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list
shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the
submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data,
drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details.
Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and
should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is
intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall
replace the substitute material with the specified material.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the
Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material
and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate
progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to
stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to
provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the
Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he
might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by
the Contractor.
Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of
the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by
the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements
of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions
which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of
construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work.
Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that
contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall
designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project.
All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop
drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the
Contractor.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-4
The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract
drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from
furnishing and erecting same.
TESTING:
The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and
required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall
furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. Notify the Architect a minimum of 24 hours
in advance of all tests.
LAWS. CODES AND ORDINANCES:
All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and
regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit
those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these
requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental
drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make
the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the
installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work,
the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance.
TERMINOLOGY:
Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar
phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and
connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to
the contrary.
Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material.
The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract.
"This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
"The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period.
"Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with
all building components in place.
"Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including
mechanical rooms.
In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even
though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items.
�., GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-5
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general
construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required
to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration
of the guarantee. The Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than
required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all
other trades before bidding.
No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength,
unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting.
The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut
to install the work covered by that section and'to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any
part of the work installed hereunder.
Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under
the respective section with all trades.
In all spaces where new work under Division 15 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing
work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing
conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade.
Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall
provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate —
support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry
occasioned by the operation.
SALVAGE MATERIALS:
All presently installed materials including pipes, valves, fittings, fixtures, ducts, etc. that are not to be —
reused shall be removed by the Contractor under the section in which the particular items normally
fall whenever they can be taken out of service. When the work is complete, there shall be no "dead"
lines left installed in any portion of the area being remodeled, which shall include any temporary
connections. All materials shall become the property of the contractor and removed from the site.
INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:
It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein
or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his
work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the
adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use.
These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise
directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect
for his information.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-6
PIM
i
t ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT:
The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a' part of these specifications. The Contractor
under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job,
whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all
�^ drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new
equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections
for the Owner furnished equipment.
Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on
the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect.
Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the
Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the
drawings.
Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute
ground for additional payment to the Contractor.
MARKING OF PIPE:
The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall
be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving
the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at
frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass
through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow.
f ^ Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on
each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50
feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no
C•- exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable
ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most
visible.
Markers shall conform completely with "The Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems (ANSI
A131 1981). Markers shall have ANSI specified color coded background, color of legend and legend
letter size.
Markers shall be equal to Seton Set Mark Pipe Markers.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives
of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in
the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and
adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-7
I
OPERATING MANUALS:
Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to
completion of the work, _the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to
complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor.
Manuals shall contain the following data:
1. Catalogue data of all equipment.
2. Shop drawings of all equipment.
3. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment.
4. Parts list for all items.
5. Name and address of each vendor.
GUARANTEE:
Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be
guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials
occurring during this period, as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the
complete satisfaction of the Architect. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate.
COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS:
Before acceptance .and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall
furnish:
1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all
changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed
with the Architect when the work is completed.
2. All manufacturers' guarantees.
3. All operating manuals.
4. Guarantees.
5. Test and Balance Report.
END OF SECTION 15000
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL
7,
SECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
SCOPE:
This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for
and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America.
Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used
under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV
Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564
Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH -P-117 Type II
No Hub Joints ASTM D3183
Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76
Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22
Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM F-492.
Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to
Chase, Crane or Mueller.
VALVES:
Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O -rings,
bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be two piece. Apollo,
Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable.
r
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-1
'w
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location,
direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings.
Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and
to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into
place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above
ground parallel with the lines of the building.
Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings.
Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as
required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature
changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of
vibration to the building structure.
Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to
permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at
connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous
material joins non-ferrous material.
In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly
may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified
method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and'are not listed, request
exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering
materials.
FLASHING AND SEALANT PANS:
Flash around all pipes passing through flat roofs with sheet lead not less than 2-1/2 lbs. per square
foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing.
Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall
be 36" square.
Small lines thru flat roofs shall be installed thru sealant pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized,
welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with sealant.
ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES:
Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed. hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling
plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space,
except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the
pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated.
No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls.
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-2 _
7
r�
i
INTERIOR TRENCHING:
Trenches for underfloor lines inside the building shall be properly excavated. Where floors are to be
poured over these lines, they shall be backfilled, tamped, and settled with water.
Where necessary to cut floors for installation of underfloor lines, the floor shall be saw cut and
patched back to a flush and level condition.
All surplus materials removed in these trenching operations shall be disposed of as directed by the
Architect.
FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS:
No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber sleeve shall be neoprene.
Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel.
Push -On Pipe: The inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned to
remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. The circular rubber gasket shall be flexed
inward and inserted in the gasket recess of the bell socket.
A thin film of gasket lubricant shall be applied to either the inside surface of the gasket or the spigot
end of the pipe or both. Gasket lubricant shall be as supplied by the pipe manufacturer and approved
by the Architect.
The spigot end of the pipe shall be entered into the socket with care used to keep the joint from
contacting the ground. The joint shall then be completed by forcing the plain end to the bottom of
the socket with a forked tool or jack type tool or other device. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth
mark shall be marked before asesmbly to assure that the spigot end is inserted to the full depth of the
joint. Field cut pipe lengths shall be filed or ground to resemble the spigot end of such pipe as
manufactured. Complete assembly instructions from the pipe manufacturer shall be followed.
Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on
one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe
threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an
approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or
prevent leaks is prohibited.
Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square, ream and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing
with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn
tubing. Make all joints with high temperature solid string or wire solder, 95 % tin, 5 % antimony,
using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for all copper tubing. Low temperature solder such
as 50150 or 40/60 will not be permitted.
�,,, PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-3
REPAIR OF LEADS:
All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows:
1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing
joints will be permitted.
2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails
to stop the leak.
When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system.
ALIGNMENT AND GRADES:
General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves,
at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be
installed straight and true to line.
Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are
encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not
interfere with existing obstructions.
END OF SECTION 15200
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-4
1
n
SECTION 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
SCOPE:
This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor,
materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the
installation of the plumbing systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories".
r
Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and
fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphalts or coal tar pitch and each having the
manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to
2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade,
no -hub may be used.
Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot
pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and Type L copper for lines smaller than 2 C.I. joints
may. be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used.
Domestic Water Lines (Hot and Cold): All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper
tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint fittings.
Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in
direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and
drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome
plated access covers, such as Wade W -8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as
required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000
with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin
bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade W -6000 -TS with square
tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size
as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines.
',,, PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-1
Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the
supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet,
item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where
required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with
PDI recommendations.
Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or
other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded spout,
provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent
any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be
chrome plated to match.
PLUMBING FIXTURES:
The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved .-
equal fixtures of American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable.
All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets,fittings, stops, risers, strainers,
tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole
covers, bolts, nuts and etc.
All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers.
All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves.
Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported
from the wall.
All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance.
Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in.
Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone
or other grout as directed by the Architect.
The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on
heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the
parties having jurisdiction.
Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas.
All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving performance standards.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-2 ,_
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE:
Water Closet WC'A'
Bowl Eljer 111-1505 water saver, wall hung,
elongated bowl, siphon jet, standard 15"
height, with closet carrier fitting and chrome
mounting bolts.
Flush valve Sloan Royal 113-1.5, 16" riser.
Seat Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open
front.
Water Closet WC'B'
Bowl Eljer 111-1505 water saver, wall hung,
elongated bowl, siphon jet, handicapped
height, with closet carrier fitting and chrome
mounting bolts. TAS compliant.
Flush Valve Sloan Royal 111-11-1/2" riser. TAS
compliant.
Seat Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open
front.
Urinal U
Fixture Eljer 161-1090 vitreous china, wall hung,
siphon jet, with chair carrier, and 3/4" top
spud. Mount at 17" height. TAS compliant.
Flush Valve Sloan Royal 186. TAS compliant.
Lavatory L
Fixture Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x
18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings. TAS
compliant.
Supply 557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator.
TAS compliant.
Tailpiece 803-0530 perforated grid with offset drain.
P -trap 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-3
Stops & Risers
802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and
wheel handle stops.
Insulation
Truebro 102W insulation for p -trap, offset
tailpiece, and hot and cold supplies.
Electric Water Cooler EWC
Fixture
Elkay EBFATL-8 bi-level for the handicapped
with stainless steel receptors and vinyl clad
cabinet. LDAPR-188 apron. TAS compliant.
P -trap
Eljer 804-1180 with tubing waste and
escutcheon.
Stop
Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and
wheel handle stop.
Mop Basin MB
Fixture
Stern -Williams SB -1502, 24x24x12 corner
precast terrazzo, 3" integral drain body,
stainless steel cap & tiling flange on two sides.
Supply
Eljer 749-1200 with vacuum breaker integral
stops, wall brace, pail hook, 3/4" threaded
spout.
DRAINS:
Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable.
All floor drains shall have auxiliary drainage rim, and deep seal p -trap.
Floor Drain FD
Fixture Wade No. W-1103 with 6" NB top, cast iron
body.
INSULATION:
Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All
coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled.
The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable.
Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as
such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-4
f
Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white draft paper and .001
inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber barrier between the foil and the paper. The foil
t" and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive.
Insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with
taped seams.
The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings.
Domestic Cold Water and Hot Water Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Manville "Micro -Lok APT 650"
molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with
Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ISOLATION VALVES:
The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the
t riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access
doors in the ceiling or chase.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the
following specifications shall apply.
d
F
Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4"
per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets.
Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity
of 2 feet per second.
Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof.
Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the
system.
Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops,
etc. at fixture rough -ins.
TESTING:
Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered
up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by
conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing.
Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks
whatsoever.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-5
Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water
before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either
in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly
closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow.
If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test
shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot
head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30
minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop
more than V in 8 hours.
END OF SECTION 15210
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-6
t
SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
.••l Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
SCOPE:
This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools
and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of ductwork,
linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, curbs and other materials and
accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably
implied therefrom.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
METAL DUCTWORK:
Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the
drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the
recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing
of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS,
First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
(SMACNA).
Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure class.
Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other
changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of
the duct in the plane of the bend.
Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in
dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make
decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1 " in 7" on any side,
but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate.
Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to
r avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline
shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such
" sleeves are not, required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area,
the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area.
ri
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-1
4
DUCT LINER:
All sheet metal supply and return air duct shall be lined.
The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of V with Mansville "Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner,
or equal duct liner coated with neoprene on one side.
Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq. ft. -degree F. at a mean
temperature of 75 F. —
The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the
coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips,
Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated
are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to
accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted.
Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA
DUCT SEALER:
All supply air and exhaust air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal
surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco
Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct
sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any
voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant.
Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system
Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal.
AIR CONTROL DEVICES:
Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various
duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a volume damper shall be installed at each point where a --
branch is taken off to achieve the final air balance.
Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel riveted or
welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in
most instances. Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither
dimension of the damper exceed 24". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the
damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and -bearings as required to resist corrosion.
In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of
the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be
constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall
have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width
and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall have neoprene blade edges and
stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly
braced to insure rigidity.
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-2 �_
r
r
Each volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device
having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable
ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts,
r the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 1200 right angle worm gear regulator with
301 concealed damper regulator. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be
*" equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts.
Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets.
FLEXIBLE DUCT:
Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an
outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel
wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch
thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer
moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct
shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters'
Laboratories under their UL -181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard
#90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M -KE for low pressure application.
Flex duct shall not exceed 3'-0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. If longer duct is
required use round sheetmetal duct with 2" thick duct insulation to make-up the difference in length.
ROUND DUCT TAPS:
All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard
as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper and positive locking nut.
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES:
Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on
the drawings for types, sizes and accessories.
All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE.
Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus, Metal -Aire, or Krueger will be acceptable.
END OF SECTION 15320
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-3
SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART GENERAL
NOTE:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
SCOPE:
The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all
hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists
materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason,
Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered.
MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT.
Hanger
Copper Tubing 3" and smaller
361 copper plated
Hanger
Outside Insulation -all lines
239
Hanger
Cast Iron Lines
239
Wall bracket
All
150, 151, or 155
Pipe Clamps
2" and Smaller
304
Pipe Clamps
3" and Larger
241
Pipe Rest
All
295 or 291
Beam Clamps
All
249, 254, 255, 282, 280
Adjuster
All
2381
HANGER RODS:
All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows:
Rod Diameter
Size of Steel Pipe or
Size of Cast Iron
Copper Tube Supported
Pipe Supported
3/8"
2-1/2" and smaller
3" and smaller
1/2"
3" and 4"
4" through 6"
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-1
HANGER SPACING:
All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of
these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives
minimum spacing for copper and steel lines. However, hangers shall be more closely spaced where
necessitated by conditions or required by code.
Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet
3/4" and smaller
5
1" through 1-1/2"
7
2" and larger
10
All cast iron lines
5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS:
All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion
and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be
governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered _
and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used
where specified or required.
All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have
a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there
shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned.
All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support
their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor
base fittings or other approved supports. --
Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be
supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a --
capped end resting on the `floor.
Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported ._
using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially
fabricated clips or U -braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in
the proper size. y
Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may
be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than
4", verify the joist strength before installation.
Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported
on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes.
Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size
and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the
preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-2 ,,�
Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material.
DUCT HANGERS:
All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
END OF SECTION 15330
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-3
i"
A
low
t
SECTION 15500 - EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified.
SCOPE:
This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for
and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein.
This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings.
Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or
specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA.
All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of
equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not.
Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to
provide a complete functional system shall be provided.
This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected,
tested and placed in service.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the
contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met,
including:
1. Space requirements
2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size)
3. Capacities
4. Clearance for maintenance
5. Quality
6. Quantity
STARTERS:
Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be
furnished by the Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details.
FANS:
The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the
drawings.
,;, EQUIPMENT 15500-1
All v -belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan
performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be
flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding .purposes
only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and
drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract.
Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower
and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v -belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service
factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be
mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible.
Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and --
vibration.
Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled.
Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect.
Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
Fans shall have factory applied finish.
Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type.
Power Roof Ventilators: All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan
wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans
shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted.
Exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels.
All fans shall have bird screens.
Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. It shall be of welded construction.
Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Acme or Greenheck.
END OF SECTION 15500
EQUIPMENT 15500-2 �.
a
i
r
SECTION 15600 - TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SCOPE:
This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools
and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting
of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air, correct setting of regulation
devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter.
Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and
balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building.
Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system.
Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that
satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions.
Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments
were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to
produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each
conditioned space.
In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a
maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone.
Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data:
1. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet.
2. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall
be listed.
The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements
required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be
included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be
provided.
When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings,
readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-1
INSTRUCTIONS:
During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of
all equipment.
Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the _
system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and
the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased.
END OF SECTION 15600
w
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600-2
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. DIVISION 16
PROJECT NUMBER 98012 ELECTRICAL
CITY OF LUBBOCK PARKS BUILDING ADA RENOVATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
16000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL .................... 1-6
16060 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING ........... 1-2
16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS .............................. 1-8
16120 CONDUCTORS ........................................ 1-4
16140 WIRING DEVICES ...................................... 1-4
16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ............................ 1-2
16441 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES ................ 1-2
16500 LIGHTING ........................................... 1-5
fs
7
10*
I
SECTION 16000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section.
ELECTRICAL LINES:
General: In general, the electrical lines to be installed under these specifications shall be run as
indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to
conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily
r- workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of electrical lines and is
F to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these
standards.
General Construction: The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the
construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the
r, Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under
construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction
to precede that general construction.
Field Conditions: The electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of electrical lines,
exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, and other installation details. The Contractor
shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to
f avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the
r equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation.
r" Locations of Electrical Devices: The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the
various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact
locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to
all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building,
and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the
Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or
• apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an
obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner.
Space Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and
apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install
require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space
with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure
to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's)
own expense.
Working Drawings: The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and
equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the
Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected
by the Contractor before the work proceeds.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-1
4
Order of Precedence: Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the conduit in order to fit
the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The installation shall be
coordinated with the work of all other trades. The following order shall govern:
1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures,
outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. '-
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, ' and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would
not be impaired by bends and offsets.
Equipment Connections: Conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most
appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein.
Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside
of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner.
r..
Exceptions and Inconsistencies: Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be
brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be
responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular _
apparatus, material, or equipment.
Intent of Drawings and Specifications: The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work
described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job,
and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or
not.
Examination of Drawings and Specifications: Each bidder shall examine the Drawings and
Specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under
Division 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective Electrical drawings, he shall notify the
Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is
assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in
accordance with the specifications.
DIMENSIONS:
General: Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions,
including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or
compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements
indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect
for consideration before proceeding with the work.
INSPECTION OF SITE:
General: The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing electrical installations., The
bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations
and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in
removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and
underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute
grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the
existing installations and/or installing any new work.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-2
r
ELECTRICAL WIRING:
Description: All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for
temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications.
Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the
Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of
exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and
phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur
between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern.
PROGRESS OF WORK:
General: The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his
work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:
General: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the
manufacturer.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
Materials: All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified.
Materials shall be free from defects and undamaged. All materials of a type for which the
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label.
Samples: The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in
substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the
quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the
two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures,
wiring devices, and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of
equipment.
Transportation: The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the
job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final
acceptance of the job.
Appurtenances: The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and
appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his
contract.
Workmanship: The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction
shall be done according to the best practice of the trade.
PROTECTION OF APPARATUS:
! General: The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly
protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary
shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any
., GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-3
apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the uncompleted
building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply
with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of
the pieces of apparatus in question.
PERMITS. FEE, ETC.:
General: The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from
the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including electric services
If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the
Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc.
The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance,
law, codes and these specifications.
TESTING:
General: The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as
specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The
Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests.
LAWS. CODES AND ORDINANCES:
General: All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes,
ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the
inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under —'
this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings
conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare
any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and,
on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the
work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the
work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. --
TERMINOLOGY:
"Furnish, Provide, Install": Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install,"
"provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment
described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for
operation unless specifically noted to the contrary.
Materials: Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called
for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material.
"Shall": The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract.
"Section": "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
"Project": "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period.
Multiple Items: In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described
singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-4
r
1*1
COOPERATION:
General: The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his
work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole,
the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of
the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any
time.
COORDINATION OF TRADES:
General: The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades.
For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be
coordinated with Division 16 for:
1. Voltage
2. Phase
3. Ampacity
4. No. and size of wires
5. Wiring diagrams
6. Starter size, details and location
7. Control devices and details
Ceiling Mounted Items: Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling
construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall
secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device
not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
Electrical Items: All items specified under Divisions 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square
r" and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades.
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
General: The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and
general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings
required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the
expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect
and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in
wrong locations.
Structural Members: No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to
lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting.
Patching: The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all
openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the
failure of any part of the work installed hereunder.
Coordination: Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching
required with all trades.
Existing Surfaces: In all spaces where new work under Division 16 is installed and no other
t^ alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-5
4
restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in
the affected trade.
Masonry Walls: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each
respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining
masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage
to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the
size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect.
PAINTING:
Painting for Division 16 shall be as follows:
1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then
given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to
match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces.
2. Paint all exposed conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal.
3. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal is visible.
RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:
General: There are portions of the existing electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the —
finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the
site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be
relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of
all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be
relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and
in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example where existing conduit and electrical
equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16.
Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation.
ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT:
General: The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The
Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on
the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer
to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new
equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections
for the Owner furnished equipment.
Discrepancies: Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from
that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the
Architect. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not
constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 16000
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-6 ..
SECTION 16060 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION:
Field Measurements: Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on
Drawings.
Abandoned Circuits: Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
Field Conditions: Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record
documents. Report discrepancies to Owner and Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing
installation.
Existing Conditions: Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
PREPARATION:
Demolition: Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
Utility Coordination: Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company.
Temporary Wiring: Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in
service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use
personnel experienced in such operations.
r
Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service new system is accepted. Disable
system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner and Telephone Utility Company at
least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make
temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK:
General: Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of the Drawings, General
Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification sections.
.., MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-1
s
New Construction: Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new
construction.
Abandoned Wiring: Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
Exposed Conduit: Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above
accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
Abandoned Devices: Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets
if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets
which are not removed.
Abandoned Equipment: Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization
equipment that has been removed.
Abandoned Lighting Fixtures: Disconnect and remove abandoned lighting fixtures., Remove
brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.
Adjacent Construction: Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and
extension work.
Existing wiring to remain active: Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain
active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
Extension of existing .wiring: Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible _
with existing electrical installations, as specified.
CLEANING AND REPAIR: --
Existing Materials: Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be
reused. .—
Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged
circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory --
showing revised circuiting arrangement.
Lighting Fixtures: Remove existing lighting fixtures for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all _
exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps and broken
electrical parts.
Ballasts: Replace the ballasts in all existing lighting fixtures with new ballasts as specified under
Section 16500 - LIGHTING.
INSTALLATION:
Relocated Materials: Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1 of
the Specifications.
END OF SECTION 16060
MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-2
FM
SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
r-. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified
herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data on all
k
conduit, conduit fittings, raceway, outlet boxes, pull boxes and junction boxes.
SCOPE:
Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all electrical raceways, conduit,
wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all fittings, supporting devices, and
other accessories required.
REGULATORY REOUIREMENTS:
Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all
applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of the General Requirements.
Accept delivery of conduit, raceway, pull and junction and outlet boxes on site and inspect for
damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect conduit and
raceway from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather.
Provide appropriate covering. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
Routing of Conduit: Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. Conduit
routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. The contractor shall
verify all site conditions and shall route as required to complete the wiring system.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CONDUITS:
Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside
with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to
ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick
corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to
ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield)
or interlocked aluminum construction; conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; --
Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or approved equivalent.
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips or interlocked _.
aluminum construction as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the
exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed and labeled; Electri-flex type "LA" or approved
equivalent.
CONDUIT FITTINGS:
Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings
conforming to ANSI/NEMA FBI; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside
box or cabinet.
Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing (Compression and Set Screw Couplings):
Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors where exposed to the
weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. Couplings
shall conform to ANSI/NEMA FBI. The connectors shall have insulated throats so as to not damage
the insulation during wire pulling operations.
I—
Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA FBI; T & B
440 Series or approved equivalent couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T &
B 3110 or 3130 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or .—
cabinet terminations.
Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA
FBI; T & B 5271 Series or approved equivalent adapters at connections between flexible and rigid
conduit; T & B 5331 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or
cabinet terminations:
WIREWAYS:
Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all
fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or approved equivalent.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-2 �.
i.
Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is
gasketed; weatherproof rainhood.
OUTLET BOXES:
General: Outlet boxes shall be UL listed of sizes and types specified.
Sheet Steel Boxes: NEMA OS 1, sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after
fabrication; Raco, Steel City, Appleton or approved equivalent.
i
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES:
Description: Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers.
Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet
{
boxes.
Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as
specified for panelboards cabinets with covers of the same gauge as cabinets, secured with corrosion
' resistant bolts or screws.
SURFACE RACEWAY:
Surface Raceway: Galvanized Steel with snap on covers, UL listed and sized as shown on the
~" Drawings. Finish surface raceway with all fittings, couplings, hangers, boxes and accessories as
required for a complete installation. The surface raceway shall be finished in the manufacturer's
standard buff finish. As manufactured by Wiremold, Walker/Parkersburg or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION:
General: Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes and enclosures for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
WIRING METHODS:
Description: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing
unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms
and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted.
CONDUIT REOUIREMENTS:
Outdoor Locations Above Grade:
1. Type: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
�.. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-3
Wet and Damp Locations:
1. Type: Rigid Steel Conduit.
2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed within 6 feet of finished floor: Rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
3. Exposed above 6 feet of finished floor where not subject to mechanical damage: Rigid steel
conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
4. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS:
Installation: Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard Of Installation." Install raceways,
boxes and enclosures according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
Conduits: All exposed runs shall be installed level and square and at proper elevations, parallel to the
surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Provide adequate headroom.
Bends: Install no more than the equivalent of four 90 -degree bends between boxes. Make field bends
with approved bending devices. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit
larger than 2 inch size. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless
otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.
Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured.
Conduit Bodies: Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction.
Completion: Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive
strain. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed.
Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12 inches long and not more than
24 inches long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to
movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. In damp or wet locations, and where
installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Connections to Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Use maximum of 6 feet flexible metal conduit at
connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required.
Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within twelve inches of steam and hot
water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at
least six inches from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid
installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at
high temperatures.
Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in
a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of
raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation
within the raceways.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-4
I—
C"
Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or
other approved closers during construction to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway. Do not
pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all
t raceways before pulling in conductors.
Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space
between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke
and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building
materials through which the raceway passes.
Roof Penetrations: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable
POW roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
R
Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to
., be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines
C shall be free from splices and shall have not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull line.
Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the
raceway,and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile
strength not less than 200 pounds.
JOINING AND TERMINATING CONDUITS:
Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading.
Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or
sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside.
Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No
running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems.
f."
Joining Electrical Metallic Tubing: Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and fasten securely.
Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter
squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be
,rll made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box. Where
terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against
the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is
�.. square to the box, and tighten the chase nipples so no threads are exposed.
5
CONDUIT SUPPORTS:
F:
Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers
t
more closely where required by conditions.
Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U -bolts,
clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor.
Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable
iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on
galvanized steel hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Arrange supports to
prevent misalignment of conduit during wire installation.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-5
Above Non -removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath
and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be
supported on ceiling runner channels.
Above Removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable
ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger
rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members.
Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling
to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and --
electrical equipment through the ceiling panels.
Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be --
supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut or approved equal angle iron or channels
suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size
and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest .�
conduit supported. Group related conduits together. Provide space on each rack for 25 percent
additional conduit.
INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES:
Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits
shall terminate. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install in
locations as shown on the Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes.
For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for
incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended.
For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size with proper square
cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit
or the device requires a larger box.
Location of boxes: Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated
or specified in section for outlet device. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate
locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended
purpose. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
Orientation of Boxes: Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section ,..
16140 - WIRING DEVICES.
Above Accessible Ceilings: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling
access panel or from removable recessed lighting fixture. Locate outlet boxes to allow lighting
fixtures positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
Fire Resistance: Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using /
materials and methods specified.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-6
r
t
I
Coordination: Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
benches, and backsplashes.
Adjacent Devices: Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar
devices.
Masonry Boxes: Locate flush mounting box in masonry wail to require cutting of masonry unit only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
Wall Boxes: Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Do not install flush mounting box
back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation
in acoustic rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately
position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting
outlet box between studs. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its
effectiveness.
Ceiling Boxes: Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. Do not fasten to
ceiling support wires or ceiling panels. Support boxes independently of conduit.
Gang Boxes: Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional
box. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by
code where job conditions so indicate.
Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems.
On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with
finished surfaces for access.
IDENTIFICATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
Branch Circuits: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring
k contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the panel and circuit number of the wiring
contained.
Emergency Systems: Each pull and junction box serving emergency circuits shall be painted red and
shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall
indicated the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained.
Other System: Boxes serving other systems shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring
contained inside the box. Identify the wiring system by name (Fire Alarm, P.A., Telephone, Data
Cable, Nurse Call, Security, Closed-circuit TV, Etc.).
r,. RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-7
t
INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS:
General: Surface raceway shall be installed parallel to the wall line in a neat and orderly manner,
The surface raceway shall be mounted using only such fasteners that are recommended by the
manufacturer for the type of surface material encountered. Paint raceway to match surface
installation.
Usage: Surface raceways and boxes shall be installed on all existing inaccessible walls where
concealed conduit is not possible. All raceways and boxes shall be painted to match existing wall
conditions.
END OF SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-8
i
4
F
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
�., Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified
herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data on
conductor and insulation materials.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate
application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under
Regulatory Requirements.
SCOPE:
Description: The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices,
connections, terminations and identification for wiring systems rated 600 volts and less.
REGULATORY REOUIREMENTS:
Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all
applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
Routing of Wire and Cable: Wire and cable routing shown on the Drawings is approximate unless
dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. Where wire and cable
routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER):
Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or
joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections. No. 8 and larger shall
be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid.
,,,, CONDUCTORS 16120-1
Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN or THWN-2 insulation, temperature rated 90
degrees C, unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type
THWN-2. Feeder circuits shall be Type THWN-2.
Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN-2 conductors, temperature rated 90
degrees C, for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature
because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat.
Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose.
Manufacturers: Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda, Simplex or approved equivalent.
JOINTS AND SPLICES:
Stranded CopperConductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or compression
connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression
connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not
acceptable.
Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved
electrical spring connectors make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes.
Split bolt connectors are not acceptable.
COLOR CODING:
General: Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All' color coding shall be
continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished
after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, `such
conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of slip-on colored plastic sleeves or
plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and
splicing points. --
Neutral and Grounding Conductors: Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey: Grounding
conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes.
208 Volt System: Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively
in the 208 volt system. ,—
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION:
General: Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
WIRE PULLING:
Preparation: Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. Pull no conductors
into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed.
CONDUCTORS 16120-2
r
t
Pulling Lines: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or
conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach
pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to
conductors.
Multiple Wires in a Raceway: All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in
simultaneously.
t•- Cable Lubricant: Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound for building wire No. 4 and
larger. All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be
non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used.
Existing Conduit: Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new conductors.
INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER):
General: Install conductors as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and the
NECA "Standard of Installation."
Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as
practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such
joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit.
Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit,
except that one 3 -wire circuit or one 4 -wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a
common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit.
This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with
three- and four-way switching.
Dedicated Neutrals: Where indicated on the drawings, branch circuits shall be installed with
dedicated neutrals in a single conduit.
Wiring at Outlets and Switches: Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet and
wall switch.
Terminations: Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment
manufacturer's published torque -tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A.
Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for
individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code.
Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise.
Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard
to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors.
Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull
boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete,
insulate it with rubber tape, and friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that
CONDUCTORS 16120-3
r'
of the conductor.. In lieu of this, vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half
lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first
protected by application of insulating putty.
Wet Locations: Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor
manufacturer's recommendations.
Identifying Labels: Adhesive vinyl cloth or vinyl self -laminating adhesive labels; stamped to clearly
identify each circuit. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. Securely fasten labels to all cables,
feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, outlet boxes, wireways, lighting, power and distribution
panelboards, etc.
Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine
lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual
circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups.
Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance
with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate _
construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers
shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports
shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of
cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as
approved by the cable manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16120
f
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
�• Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified
herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog information
showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate
application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under
Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of Product.
SCOPE:
Description: Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with
lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all
applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture.
Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, General Electric, Leviton, Pass and Seymour are also acceptable.
Specification Grade: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed.
COLORS:
IvoryBrown: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors
and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors.
WIRING DEVICES 16140-1
WALL SWITCHES (15 or 20 Ampere):
15 Ampere Wall Switches: For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277
volts:
1. Single pole wall switch: Hubbell HBL1201.
2. Three-way wall switch: Hubbell HBL1203.
RECEPTACLES:
15 Ampere Receptacles:
1. Duplex: 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Hubbell No. 5262 (NEMA
5-15R).
2. Ground Fault Current Interrupter: 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex
with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GF -5262 (NEMA 5-15R).
WEATHERPROOF DEVICES:
Duplex Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum
coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No. 5206WO.
GFCI Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum coverplate
having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No. WPFS26.
COVERPLATES:
General: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred
devices.
Stainless Steel For Flush Mounted Devices: Coverplates in finished spaces shall be 0.040" stamped
satin stainless steel. Sierra Electric Corporation "S -Line" or approved equivalent. In unfinished or
machinery spaces plates shall be smooth plastic to match devices which they cover. Sierra "P -Line"
or approved equivalent.
Surface Mounted Devices: Zinc -coated sheet metal with rounded or beveled edges, of same size as --
boxes, for indoor use; cast alloy plates with gaskets for outdoor use.
Weatherproof Devices: Die cast aluminum with spring loaded gasketed covers to close automatically
when plugs are removed. Stainless steel springs. UL listed for use in damp locations and wet
locations, cover closed. Orient device to maintain watertightness. Sierra 4500 series or approved
equivalent. -
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION:
Outlet Boxes: Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. Coordinate mounting heights
with the Architectural elevations. Coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural baseboard
height. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
Floor Boxes: Verify floor box locations and that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
WIRING DEVICES 16140-2
t
1t
Circuit Wiring: Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for
connection to wiring devices.
PREPARATION:
Outlet Boxes: Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. Clean debris
from outlet boxes.
INSTALLATION:
General: Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with
NECA "Standard of Installation." Install devices plumb and level.
Switches: Install switches with OFF position down.
Wall Dimmers: Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for
ganging as instructed by manufacturer. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
Receptacles: Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. Connect wiring device grounding
terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Connect wiring devices by wrapping
conductor around screw terminal.
Coverplates: Install wall plates when painting is complete. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed
in masonry walls. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished
areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
Adjacent Devices: Group adjacent devices under single, multigang wall plates.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Wiring Devices: Inspect each wiring device for defects. Operate each wall switch with circuit
energized and verify proper operation. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. Test each
receptacle device for proper polarity. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
ADJUSTING:
General: Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION:
Inside Coverplate: At each wiring device identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is
finally connected in indelible ink.
�... WIRING DEVICES 16140-3
i
MOUNTING HEIGHTS:
General: Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the
centerline of the device at the indicated height. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at
counters or other millwork shall be installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall
switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. Unless otherwise noted on
the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights.
1. Wall Switch: 48".
2. Receptacle: 18".
END OF SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES 16140-4
i
7
SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified
herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data for
nameplates, labels, and markers.
SCOPE:
Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing identification of electrical materials,
equipment and installations.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all
applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS:
Nameplates: Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates
constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3 -ply, with black surfaces and white
core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/4" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature
on the label shall include the name of the item or equipment served utilizing the equipment names
shown on the drawings.
Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for
identification of individual wall switches and receptacles.
WIRE MARKERS:
Description: Adhesive vinyl cloth or self laminating vinyl adhesive labels. Thomas & Betts Type
WBC, WES or approved equivalent. Pre-printed, type -written or field printed is acceptable.
Handwritten labels are not acceptable.
FELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1
Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, switchboard gutters, pull boxes and wireways
Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as actually installed.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION:
Cleaning: Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
APPLICATION:
Equipment: Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment
front using adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in
finished locations.
Underground Conduit: Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one
tape per trench at 12 inches below finished grade.
EQUIPMENT:
General: All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved nameplates.
Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Switchboards.
2. Panelboards.
3. Motor control centers.
4. Dry type transformers.
5. Main switches.
CONTROL DEVICES:
General: All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device served. All electrical
control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment served. Electrical control
devices to be labeled shall include but not limited to the following:
1. Contactors.
2. Motor Starters.
3. Relays.
4. Disconnect Switches. _
5. Timeswitches.
END OF SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION . 16195-2
SECTION 16441 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified
herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide switch ratings, enclosure type and
dimensions.
Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein.
SCOPE:
Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the
complete electrical distribution system.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all
applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of disconnect switches on site and
inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect
from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide
appropriate covering.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
Location of Disconnect switches: Verify locations of disconnect switches prior to installation.
Disconnect switches are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated.
Locate as required to complete wiring system.
,., CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
Description: NEMA KS1, Type HD heavy duty, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle
lockable in OFF position. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick
break. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated.
Enclosures: Provide disconnect switches in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather;
elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required.
Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FUl, Class RK1 fuses.
Auxiliary Poles: Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in
switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters.
Manufacturers: Switches shall be of General Electric, Westinghouse or Square D manufacture, _
equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches.
TUMBLER SWITCHES:
Description: Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within
weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused
disconnects; General Electric Type RB or approved equivalent. _
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Installation: Install disconnect switches level and plumb.
General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NECA "Standard of
Installation. "
Connections: Connect disconnect switches to wiring system and to ground as indicated and as
instructed by the manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts
according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL
Standard 486A.
END OF SECTION 16441
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-2
Ca.
t.
f SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
r.. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and
l
Division 1 Specification Sections.
Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified
herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Include manufacturer's catalog data and
drawings on all interior and exterior lighting fixtures with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled
by Luminaire "Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled.
Ballast and lamp data shall accompany fixture submittals. Submit dimensioned drawings and
performance data including coefficients of utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height
ratio, efficiency and visual comfort probability. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of
finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect/Engineer for every type
fixture.
►"' Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's installation
F instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing
agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
r` protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructionls
for each product.
SUBSTITUTIONS:
General: Where a lighting fixture has been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer's name and
catalog number, it has been done in order to establish a standard. Any substitution to the scheduled
lighting fixture shall be of equal or better quality. No substitution shall be made without the review
of the engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality. It is the contractor's responsibility to submit
sufficient data for review by the Engineer. If requested by the engineer, the contractor shall provide
samples of each proposed substitution for review. Should a substitution be unacceptable to the
Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the originally specified lighting fixture.
APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS:
General: The contract will be on the basis of materials scheduled on the drawings without
consideration of possible substitute of "or -equal" items. Application for the acceptance of substitute
lighting fixtures will not be considered until after the effective date of the agreement. Submit requests
for substitute materials under provisions of the General Conditions and the General Requirements.
Approval for lighting fixture substitution shall not be given prior to the bid opening.
LIGHTING 16500-1
CATALOG NUMBERS:
General: All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog _
number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes
corresponding to the features called for.
SCOPE:
Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and -
incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all
applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inca as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING:
General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of lighting fixtures on site and inspect for damage.
Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect lighting fixtures from
degradation by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering.
Lighting fixtures shall remain in factory protective shipping cartons until installation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS: '-
Locations: The drawings are schematic and only indicate the approximate location of lighting
fixtures. The precise location of lighting fixtures shall be coordinated with the architectural reflected --
ceiling plan and other architectural features.
Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Verify that there will be sufficient headroom for the installation of
recessed lighting fixtures prior to ordering lighting fixtures. Verify ceiling system type and provide
suitable plaster ring or frame if required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES: _
General: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish
fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any
designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar
usage.
LIGHTING 16500-2
ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS:
General: Electronic ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or integrated electronic components and
shall have a minimum frequency of operation of 20 kHz and shall operate without visible flicker.
Ballast shall be UL listed Class P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a minimum
power factor of 95% and an maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.6. Input current total harmonic
distortion shall be 10% maximum. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output with input voltage
�^ variations of plus or minus 25%. Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats
l cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. Ballasts shall withstand line transients as defined in
ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A and shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 18, for
t•• non -consumer equipment.
Ballasts for T8 Rapid Start Lamps: Ballasts shall have the following maximum ANSI input watts
when used with F32T8 "Octron" lamps. Ballasts shall be Advance Mark V IC, Motorola Rapid Start
or approved equivalent.
1. One Lamp: 31 watts.
2. Two Lamp: 61 watts.
3. Three Lamp: 95 watts.
4. Four Lamp: 121 watts.
FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY:
Rapid Start Lamps: Emergency fluorescent power supplies shall consist of a high-temperature,
maintenance -free nickel cadmium battery, a charger, and electronic circuitry in one case. Provide a
solid-state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery, and a double pole test switch.
The emergency ballast shall be capable of operating one 40 watt T8 or T12 lamp a minimum of 90
minutes producing a minimum of 1100 lumens. The unit shall consume 4 watts of input power and
have 24 watt-hour battery capacity. The unit shall be UL listed for installation either inside or on top
of the fixture, warranted for five years from date of purchase.
ACRYLIC LENSES:
�•. 0.125 Inch Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin
acrylic with a minimum nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. Only KSH brand lenses shall be
acceptable.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS:
General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of
the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the ratings and types scheduled on the drawings or
as required by the lighting fixture manufacture; Philips, General Electric, Sylvania or pre -approved
equivalent.
T-8 4100K: Rapid start, T-8, 4100K, 32 watt, 2850 initial lumens, 82 CRI, 20000 hour minimum
with 3 hours per start equal to Philips F32T8/TL841.
LIGHTING 16500-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are
diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be
level, square with the general construction and securely attached according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Lay -in Type Fixtures: Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through
ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. Fixtures shall be
securely fastened to the ceiling framing member by the use of four UL listed clips. Support
luminaries larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling grid. Install recessed luminaries to
permit removal from below.
Continuous Rows: Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and
plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible.
Accessories: Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
Connections: Connect luminaries to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16110 -
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with
insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. Bond products and metal accessories
to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Lamps: Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
Firestopping: Install recessed luminaries using accessories and firestopping materials to meet
regulatory requirements for fire rating. —
REUSED FIXTURES:
General: Where existing lighting fixtures are to be relocated, carefully remove and store the fixture.
When it is ready to be hung, thoroughly wash all dirt and dust from the fixture and lens, hang the
fixture and install new lamps. Should any such fixtures be damaged in this process replace them with
matching new ones at no cost to the owner.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
General: Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and
operation.
ADJUSTING:
General: Aim and adjust luminaries as indicated or as directed.
Exit Signs: Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
LIGHTING 16500-4 ....
CLEANING:
General: Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. Remove dirt and
debris from enclosures. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Clean
finishes and touch up damage.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK:
General: Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
16500-5
COPY
121
FILE
BREAK
RM.
CONFERENCE
12"
120
I'2
JANTOR
121 '
N �
VAULT
'
s`
I z0 OFFICE
OFFICE
�,
OFFICE
125
OFFICE
129
128
�` _ ' I18
117
WOMBN'S
CLO. 132
126
CLO.
HALL
UI
113
OFFICE
'
LOBBY
100
OFFICE OFFICE
- OFFICE
-
111
112
109
i
1,
Ac
OFFICE
OFFICE OFFICE
OFFICE
134
101 102
103
OFFICE
116
OFFICE
115 -
o
NTE12VIEW v
108
STOPILI
1G;
OFFICE RECEPTION
104 106
FIRST FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8" - 1'-<